Audiovox PEQ-200 Owner`s manual

00_RX-V2065_G_cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, July 23, 2009 10:40 AM
G
RX-V2065
RX-V2065
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
© 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved.
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
Printed in Malaysia
WS30760
Caution: Read this before operating your unit.
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Yamaha
will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use
of this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
Yamaha service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “Troubleshooting” section on common
operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty.
Caution-i En
18 Before moving this unit, press LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF to
set this unit to the standby mode, and disconnect the AC
power plug from the wall outlet in the main room.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are:
..... AC 110/120/220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz (General model)
.........................AC 220/230-240 V, 50/60 Hz (Asia model)
20 The batteries shall not be exposed to excessive heat such as
sunshine, fire or like.
21 Excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can
cause hearing loss.
22 When replacing the batteries, be sure to use batteries of the
same type. Danger of explosion may happen if batteries are
incorrectly replaced.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,
it is not disconnected from the AC power source even
if you turn off this unit by LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF.
In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very
small quantity of power.
■ For U.K. customers
If the socket outlets in the home are not suitable for the
plug supplied with this appliance, it should be cut off and
an appropriate 3 pin plug fitted. For details, refer to the
instructions described below.
Note
The plug severed from the mains lead must be destroyed, as a
plug with bared flexible cord is hazardous if engaged in a live
socket outlet.
■ Special Instructions for U.K. Model
IMPORTANT
THE WIRES IN MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:
Blue: NEUTRAL
Brown: LIVE
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus
may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the
terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured
BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be
connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or
coloured RED.
Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth
terminal of the three pin plug.
Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment and used Batteries
These symbols on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents mean that used electrical
and electronic products and batteries should not be mixed with general household waste.
For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products and used batteries, please take them to
applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/
EC and 2006/66/EC.
By disposing of these products and batteries correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and
prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise
arise from inappropriate waste handling.
For more information about collection and recycling of old products and batteries, please contact your
local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items.
[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union]
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact
your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):
This symbol might be used in combination with a chemical symbol. In this case it complies with the
requirement set by the Directive for the chemical involved.
Limited Guarantee for European Economic Area (EEA) and Switzerland
Thank you for having chosen a Yamaha product. In the unlikely event that your Yamaha product needs guarantee service, please contact the dealer from
whom it was purchased. If you experience any difficulty, please contact Yamaha representative office in your country. You can find full details on our
website (http://www.yamaha-hifi.com/ or http://www.yamaha-uk.com/ for U.K. resident).
The product is guaranteed to be free from defects in workmanship or materials for a period of two years from the date of the original purchase. Yamaha
undertakes, subject to the conditions listed below, to have the faulty product or any part(s) repaired, or replaced at Yamaha’s discretion, without any charge
for parts or labour. Yamaha reserves the right to replace a product with that of a similar kind and/or value and condition, where a model has been
discontinued or is considered uneconomic to repair.
Conditions
1. The original invoice or sales receipt (showing date of purchase, product code and dealer’s name) MUST accompany the defective product, along with a
statement detailing the fault. In the absence of this clear proof of purchase, Yamaha reserves the right to refuse to provide free of charge service and the
product may be returned at the customer’s expense.
2. The product MUST have been purchased from an AUTHORISED Yamaha dealer within the European Economic Area (EEA) or Switzerland.
3. The product must not have been the subject of any modifications or alterations, unless authorised in writing by Yamaha.
4. The following are excluded from this guarantee:
a. Periodic maintenance and repair or replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear.
b. Damage resulting from:
(1) Repairs performed by the customer himself or by an unauthorised third party.
(2) Inadequate packaging or mishandling, when the product is in transit from the customer. Please note that it is the customer’s responsibility to
ensure the product is adequately packaged when returning the product for repair.
(3) Misuse, including but not limited to (a) failure to use the product for its normal purpose or in accordance with Yamaha’s instructions on the proper
use, maintenance and storage, and (b) installation or use of the product in a manner inconsistent with the technical or safety standards in force in
the country where it is used.
(4) Accidents, lightning, water, fire, improper ventilation, battery leakage or any cause beyond Yamaha’s control.
(5) Defects of the system into which this product is incorporated and/or incompatibility with third party products.
(6) Use of a product imported into the EEA and/or Switzerland, not by Yamaha, where that product does not conform to the technical or safety
standards of the country of use and/or to the standard specification of a product sold by Yamaha in the EEA and/or Switzerland.
5. Where the guarantee differs between the country of purchase and the country of use of the product, the guarantee of the country of use shall apply.
6. Yamaha may not be held responsible for any losses or damages, whether direct, consequential or otherwise, save for the repair or replacement of the
product.
7. Please backup any custom settings or data, as Yamaha may not be held responsible for any alteration or loss to such settings or data.
8. This guarantee does not affect the consumer’s statutory rights under applicable national laws in force or the consumer’s rights against the dealer arising
from their sales/purchase contract.
Caution-ii En
■
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Notes on remote controls and batteries
Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
Do not drop the remote control.
Do not leave or store the remote control in the following
conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
Insert the battery according to the polarity markings (+ and -).
Change all batteries if you notice the following conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control narrows
– the transmit indicator does not flash or is dim
If the batteries run out, immediately remove them from the
remote control to prevent an explosion or acid leak.
If you find leaking batteries, discard the batteries
immediately, taking care not to touch the leaked material. If
the leaked material comes into contact with your skin or gets
into your eyes or mouth, rinse it away immediately and
consult a doctor. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly
before installing new batteries.
Do not use old batteries together with new ones. This may
shorten the life of the new batteries or cause old batteries to
leak.
Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Specification of batteries may
be different even though they look the same.
Before inserting new batteries, wipe the compartment clean.
If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote
control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. In such a
case, install new batteries and set the remote control code.
Dispose of batteries according to your regional regulations.
Caution-iii En
Contents
INTRODUCTION
Front panel ................................................................. 4
Rear panel .................................................................. 5
Front panel display..................................................... 6
Remote control........................................................... 6
Simplified remote control .......................................... 8
Quick start guide..................................................... 9
L
Connections ...........................................................10
Playback of the USB storage device........................ 38
Using PC servers................................................... 39
Windows Media Player 11 setup ............................. 39
Playback of PC music contents................................ 39
Using the Internet Radio feature......................... 41
Listening to Internet Radio ...................................... 41
Other functions ..................................................... 42
Selecting the HDMI OUT jack ................................ 42
Using the HDMI™ control function........................ 42
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 42
ADVANCED OPERATION
Setting the option menu for each input source
(Option menu)................................................... 43
Option menu items................................................... 43
Selecting a video signal to be output during an audio
reproduction......................................................... 45
Operating various settings for this unit
(Setup menu) ..................................................... 46
Basic operation of the Setup menu .......................... 48
Using multi-zone configuration ........................... 58
Connecting Zone2/3................................................. 58
Controlling Zone2/3................................................. 60
Controlling other components with the remote
control................................................................ 61
Using Auto Setup..................................................... 21
When an error message is displayed during
measurement........................................................ 23
When a warning message is displayed after
measurement........................................................ 23
Setting remote control codes.................................... 61
Resetting all remote control codes........................... 61
Programming from other remote controls ............... 62
BASIC OPERATION
Playback.................................................................24
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting.................................................... 65
Glossary ................................................................. 76
Sound field program information ....................... 79
Information on HDMI™...................................... 80
Specifications......................................................... 81
Index ...................................................................... 82
(at the end of this manual)
Information about software...................................i
List of remote control codes.................................iii
Enjoying the sound field programs .....................27
APPENDIX
Selecting sound field programs................................ 27
Enjoying unprocessed input sources
(Straight decode mode)........................................ 30
Enjoying sound field programs without surround
speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) ....................... 30
Enjoy sound field programs with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA™) ........................................ 30
Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode ............................... 30
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Basic procedure........................................................ 24
Using the SCENE function ...................................... 24
Selecting a source on the GUI screen ...................... 25
Muting audio output................................................. 25
Adjusting high/low frequency sounds
(tone control) ....................................................... 25
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 25
Using your headphones............................................ 26
Changing information on the front panel display .... 26
Advanced setup..................................................... 63
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Optimizing the speaker setting for your
listening room (YPAO) ..................................... 21
BASIC
OPERATION
Placing speakers....................................................... 10
Connecting speakers ................................................ 11
Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 13
Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 14
Connecting other components ................................. 16
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver.................... 18
Connecting to the network ....................................... 19
Connecting a USB storage device ........................... 19
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks.................................. 19
Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 20
Connecting the power cable..................................... 20
Turning this unit on and off ..................................... 20
Using USB storage devices................................... 38
PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio receiver
and your Bluetooth component............................ 37
Playback of the Bluetooth™ component ................. 37
INTRODUCTION
Features.................................................................... 2
About this manual................................................... 3
Supplied accessories................................................ 3
Part names and functions....................................... 4
Using Bluetooth™ components ........................... 37
FM/AM tuning ...................................................... 31
Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station
(Frequency tuning) .............................................. 31
Registering FM/AM stations and tuning in
(Preset tuning)...................................................... 31
Radio Data System tuning....................................33
English
Displaying the Radio Data System information ...... 33
Selecting the Radio Data System program type
(PTY Seek) .......................................................... 33
Using the enhanced other networks (EON) data
service.................................................................. 34
Using iPod™ ..........................................................35
Controlling iPod™................................................... 35
1 En
INTRODUCTION
Features
■ Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
• Minimum RMS Output Power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.08%
THD, 8 Ω)
• FRONT L/R: 130 W + 130 W
• CENTER: 130 W
• SURROUND L/R: 130 W + 130 W
• SURROUND BACK L/R: 130 W + 130 W
■ Speaker/Preout outputs
• Speaker terminals (7-channel), extra speaker terminals
(2-channel for presence or Zone2, 2-channel for
Zone3), preout jacks (7.1-channel)
■
Input/Output terminals
Input terminals
• HDMI input x 5 (rear x 4, front V-AUX x 1)
• Audio/Visual input
[Audio] Digital input (coaxial) x 2, digital input
(optical) x 2, analog input x 3 (rear x 2, front V-AUX
x 1)
[Video] Component video x 2, S-video x 1, Video x 5
(rear x 4, front V-AUX x 1)
• Audio input (analog) x 2
• Phono input (analog) x 1
• Multi-channel audio input (7.1-channel)
• DOCK terminal to connect a Yamaha iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-11, sold separately) or Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold
separately)
• USB port to connect a USB storage device
• NETWORK port to connect a PC or access the Internet
Radio via LAN
Output terminals
• Monitor output
[Audio/Video] HDMI x 2
[Video] Component video x 1, Video x 1
• Audio/Visual output
[Audio] Analog x 1
[Video] Video x 1
• Audio output
Digital (optical) x 1, Analog x 1
• Zone2/3 output
Analog x 2
Other terminals
Remote input x 1, Remote output x 1
Trigger output x 2
■
•
•
•
•
Proprietary Yamaha technology for the
creation of sound fields
CINEMA DSP 3D
Compressed Music Enhancer mode
Virtual CINEMA DSP
SILENT CINEMA
2 En
■ Digital audio decoders
• Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus decoder
• DTS-HD Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution
Audio, DTS Express
• Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
• DTS, DTS 96/24 decoder, DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, DTS-ES
Discrete 6.1
• Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic
IIx decoder
• DSD decoder
• DTS NEO:6 decoder
■ Sophisticated FM/AM tuner
• 40-station random and direct preset tuning
• Automatic preset tuning
• Radio Data System tuning
■ HDMI™ (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
• HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or highdefinition video as well as multi-channel digital audio.
– Automatic audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
information capability
– Deep Color video signal (30/36 bit) transmission
– “x.v.Color” video signal transmission capability
– High refresh rate and high resolution video signals
– High definition digital audio format signals capability
• Analog to analog and HDMI digital video upconversion (video ↔ component video → HDMI)
capability for monitor out
• Analog video input up-scaling for HDMI digital video
output 480i(576i) or 480p(576p) → 720p, 1080i or 1080p
• HDMI control function supported
• Dual HDMI output (possible to select individual or
simultaneous output)
■ Automatic speaker setup features
• “YPAO” (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer) for automatically optimizing speaker
outputs suitable for listening environments.
■ Other features
• 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
• GUI (graphic user interface) menus to optimize this unit
to suit individual audiovisual system
• iPod, USB and PC file browsing
• Album art display capability
• Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources
• Adaptive dynamic range controlling capability
• SCENE function for changing input sources and sound
field programs with one key
• Bi-amplification connection capability
• Multi-zone function (Zone2/3)
• DHCP automatic or manual network configuration
About this manual
This receiver supports network connections.
Bluetooth™
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG and is used by
Yamaha in accordance with a license agreement.
BASIC
OPERATION
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent No’s:
5,451,942;5,956,674;5,974,380;5,978,762;6,226,616;6,487,535 &
other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS is a
registered trademark and the DTS logos, Symbol, DTS-HD and DTSHD Master Audio are trademark of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2007 DTS, Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
PREPARATION
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories
INTRODUCTION
• Some operations can be performed by using either the keys on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the key names differ between
the front panel and the remote control, the key name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of
differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
• For better viewing, we increase the size of characters used in example screen images in this manual. Therefore the size ratio of characters to other
objects (such as icons) may be different from that of the actual display image.
• “LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or “dHDMI 1” (example) indicates the name of the parts on the front panel or the remote control. Refer to the
attached sheet or “Part names and functions” (page 4) for the information about each position of the parts.
• ☞ indicates the page describing the related information.
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks, or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
x.v.Color
“x.v.Color” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.
iPod™
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows Media Audio, Windows
Media Connect and Windows Media Player are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the United
States and/or other countries.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Supplied accessories
Check that you received all of the following parts.
• Remote control (page 6)
• Simplified remote control (page 8)
• Batteries (2) (AAA, R03, UM-4) (page 6)
• Power cable (page 20)
•
•
•
•
ADVANCED
OPERATION
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation.
Optimizer microphone (page 21)
AM loop antenna (page 20)
Indoor FM antenna (page 20)
VIDEO AUX input cover (page 19)
APPENDIX
English
3 En
Part names and functions
Front panel
A BC
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
HDMI THROUGH
VOLUME
ZONE3
ON/OFF
ZONE2
ON/OFF
ZONE
CONTROLS
l
INFO
PRESET
h
l
BAND
MEMORY
TUNING
h
SCENE
BD/DVD
TV
RADIO
CD
PROGRAM
MAIN ZONE
PHONES
USB
TONE CONTROL
INPUT
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
VIDEO AUX
OPTIMIZER MIC
ON/OFF
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
L
A
M
VIDEO
N
O
P
Q
ZONE2 ON/OFF
R
S
O
Switches Zone2 on and off (page 60).
B
C
ZONE3 ON/OFF
D
ZONE CONTROLS
Switches Zone3 on and off (page 60).
Selects a zone to control with the main amplifier operations
(page 60).
E
F
G
PROGRAM selector
Q
STRAIGHT
Changes sound field programs (page 27).
Toggles between the selected sound field program and straight
decode mode (page 30).
R
S
T
INPUT selector
U
OPTIMIZER MIC jack
Selects an input source (page 24).
MEMORY
BAND
Change the tuner bands between FM and AM.
I
TUNING l / h
J
Front panel display
K
VOLUME control
L
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
M
PHONES jack
N
USB port
Changes FM/AM frequencies.
Displays information on this unit (page 6).
Controls the volume of this unit (page 24).
Turns this unit on and off (page 20).
For plugging headphones (page 26).
For connecting a USB memory device or USB portable audio
player (page 19)
4 En
PURE DIRECT
Changes mode to Pure Direct mode (page 25). This key lights up
when Pure Direct mode is on.
For connecting the supplied optimizer microphone and adjusting
output characteristics of speakers (page 21).
Registers FM/AM stations as preset stations (page 32).
H
SCENE
Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field
programs (page 24).
PRESET l / h
Selects an FM/AM preset station (page 32).
V
TONE CONTROL
P
INFO
Changes information (input, DSP program, audio decoder, etc)
displayed on the front panel display (page 26).
U
HDMI IN
Adjusts high-frequency/low-frequency output of speakers
(page 25).
HDMI THROUGH
Lights up in the following cases while this unit is on standby.
• when the HDMI control function is on
• when the HDMI signal standby-through function is currently
working
T
AUDIO
V
VIDEO AUX jacks
For connecting a game console, camcorder or digital camera to
either the HDMI IN jack or analog AUDIO/VIDEO jacks
(page 19).
Part names and functions
Rear panel
b
c
d
RS- 232C
e
f
TRIGGER OUT
1
2
12V
NETWORK
0.1A MAX.
DOCK
HDMI OUT 1
(HDMI CONTROL)
PHONO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT 2
(BD/DVD)
UNBAL.
FM
HDMI 4
HDMI 3
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
ANTENNA
S VIDEO
g
INTRODUCTION
a
SPEAKERS
SP2
ZONE3
EXTRA SP
SP1
ZONE2/PRESENCE
SINGLE
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
PREPARATION
IN
PR
GND
OPTICAL
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO
AC IN
VIDEO
PB
PB
VIDEO
Y
Y
FRONT
CENTER
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 2
AV 3
( TV )
AV 1
SINGLE
AV 4
AV 5
i
AV 6
AV
OUT
j
FRONT
AUDIO1
AUDIO2
k
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
AUDIO
OUT
l
DOCK terminal
PHONO jacks
h
i
j
For connecting an external terminal with a trigger input terminal
to operate it linked with operation of this unit. Consult your
dealer for details.
k
o
DIGITAL AUDIO jack
AV 1-6 jacks
AV OUT jacks
HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks
l
AUDIO 1/2 jacks
For connecting external components for audio inputs 1-2
(page 16).
For connecting HDMI-compatible video monitors (page 14).
MULTI CH INPUT jacks
For connecting a player that supports a multi-channel output
(page 18).
HDMI 1-4 jacks
m
AUDIO OUT jacks
ANTENNA terminals
Outputs audio signals from a selected analog input source to an
external component (page 16).
For connecting supplied FM and AM antennas (page 20).
ZONE2/3 OUT jacks
MONITOR OUT jacks
Output sound of this unit to an external amplifier set in a
different zone (page 58).
Outputs visual signals from this unit to a video monitor, such as
a TV (page 14).
n
NETWORK port
o
AC IN
For connecting the supplied power cable (page 20).
For connecting to the network (page 19).
g
APPENDIX
For connecting an external component that supports the remote
control function (page 18).
PRE OUT jacks
Outputs multi-channel signals from up to 7.1 channels to an
external amplifier (page 18).
REMOTE IN/OUT jacks
f
n
Outputs audio/visual signals from a selected analog input source
to an external component (page 16).
TRIGGER OUT 1/2 jacks
For connecting external components for HDMI inputs 1-4
(page 16).
1 SUBWOOFER 2
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
e
SUR. BACK
PRE OUT
ADVANCED
OPERATION
d
SURROUND
For connecting external components for audio/visual inputs 1-6
(page 16).
RS-232C terminal
Control expansion terminal for factory use only. Consult your
dealer for details.
FRONT
Outputs audio signals from a selected digital audio input source
to an external component (page 16).
For connecting a turntable (page 16).
c
ZONE3
OUT
m
For connecting an optional Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS11) or Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA-10) (page 18).
b
ZONE2
OUT
CENTER
BASIC
OPERATION
h
a
OPTICAL
(CD)
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
SURROUND
CENTER
SPEAKERS terminals
For connecting front, center, surround and surround back
speakers (page 11). Connect the presence speakers (page 11) or
the speakers for Zone2/3 (page 59) to EXTRA SP terminals.
English
5 En
Part names and functions
Front panel display
a
b
c
d
e
SW
PL
PR
C
L
R
SL
SR
SBL SB SBR
h
a
i
h
g
HDMI indicator
Lights up during normal communication when HDMI is
selected as an input source.
The respective indicator lights up when HDMI signals are
output from the HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks.
MUTE indicator
VOLUME indicator
Displays volume levels.
h
Cursor indicators
Light up if corresponding cursors on the remote control are
available for operations.
CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when a sound field program that uses CINEMA DSP
is selected.
i
Multi information display
c
CINEMA DSP 3D indicator
j
Speaker indicators
d
Tuner indicator
Lights up when CINEMA DSP 3D is activated.
Lights up during receiving radio broadcast signals from an FM/
AM station (page 31).
e
ZONE2/ZONE3 indicator
Lights up when Zone2 or Zone3 is turned on.
f
Displays menu items and settings for the current operation.
Indicate speaker terminals from which signals are currently
output.
Subwoofer
Presence L
Front L
Surround L
SLEEP indicator
Lights up when the sleep timer is activated (page 42).
j
Flashes when audio is muted.
OUT 1/OUT 2 indicators
b
g
VOL.
SLEEP
ZONE ZONE
2
3 MUTE
STEREO
3 TUNED
OUT 1 OUT 2
f
Surround back L
SW
PL
PR
C
L
R
SL
SR
SBL SB SBR
Center
Presence R
Front R
Surround R
Surround back R
Surround back
Remote control
Note
• Before installing batteries or using the remote control, make sure that you read “Notes on remote controls and batteries” in the “Caution” section.
■
Installing batteries
a
c
b
a Take off the battery compartment cover.
b Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, R03, UM-4)
according to the polarity markings (+ and -) on the
inside of the battery compartment.
c Snap the battery compartment cover back into the
place.
6 En
■ Operation range
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be
sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
Remote control sensor window
within 6 m (20 ft)
30
30
Part names and functions
n
a
ZONE 2
ZONE 3 TRANSMIT
MAIN
b
POWER
SOURCE
FM/AM
MEMORY
PRESET k / n
TUNING k / n
CODE SET
POWER
SLEEP
o
p
HDMI
1
2
3
4
4
AV
d
1
2
3
5
6
1
PHONO
MULTI
q
f
2
g
HDMI
DOCK
TUNER
FM
h
AM
INFO
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
g
HDMI OUT
STEREO
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
i
BD
DVD
TV
CD
ON SCREEN
ENTER
RETURN
t
k
MENU
MUTE
v
USB
NET RADIO
PC
1
2
3
5
6
7
9
0
10
4
External component operation keys
Operate recording, playback etc. of external components
(page 61).
u
REC
settings.
Confirms a selected item.
Returns to the previous screen or
ends the menu display.
l
Numeric keys
m
TV control keys
n
TRANSMIT
o
CODE SET
Enter numbers.
w
Enables operations of a TV or a projector (page 61).
8
Lights up when a signal is output from the remote control.
ENT
TV
INPUT
m
Sets remote control codes for external component operations
(page 61).
POWER
TV VOL
TV CH
MUTE
p
POWER
q
SLEEP
r
Sound selection keys
s
OPTION
t
VOLUME +/–
u
DISPLAY
Switches this unit on and standby (page 20).
Remote control signal transmitter
b
Zone selection switch
Transmits infrared signals.
Switches amplifiers (main, Zone2 or Zone3) to be operated by
the remote control (page 60).
c
d
Selects sound field programs (page 27).
Displays the Option menu (page 43).
SOURCE POWER
Switches an external component on and off.
Adjust the volume of this unit (page 24).
Input selection keys
DOCK
TUNER
USB/NET
Selects HDMI inputs 1 through 4.
Selects AV inputs 1 through 6.
Selects AUDIO inputs 1 and 2.
Selects a signal input from the VIDEO AUX jacks.
Selects a signal input from the PHONO jacks.
Selects a signal input from the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks.
Selects a Yamaha iPod universal dock/Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver connected to the DOCK terminal.
Selects the FM/AM tuner.
Selects a USB device or a signal input via
network (selected by wSub-input
selection keys).
Displays the play information on the video monitor.
When an iPod is connected: Changes the operation mode of the
iPod connected to the Yamaha iPod universal dock (page 35).
v
MUTE
w
Sub-input selection keys
Turns the mute function on and off (page 25).
Selects USB, NET RADIO or PC when “USB/NET” is selected
as the input source.
APPENDIX
HDMI 1-4
AV 1-6
AUDIO 1/2
V-AUX
PHONO
MULTI
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Switches the sleep timer operations (page 42).
a
ADVANCED
OPERATION
l
Displays the GUI screen (page 25).
DISPLAY
TOP
MENU
k
Cursors k / n / l / h Select menu items or change
s
VOLUME
ENTER
j
RADIO
OPTION
RETURN
ON SCREEN
BASIC
OPERATION
j
i
r
MOVIE
SCENE
h
SCENE
Switches between linked sets of input sources and sound field
programs (page 24).
TUNING
MEMORY
MUSIC
HDMI OUT
PREPARATION
PRESET
INFO
Switches the HDMI OUT jacks to output HDMI signals
(page 42).
USB/NET
e
f
Switches a band between FM and AM.
Presets radio stations.
Selects a preset station.
Changes FM/AM frequencies.
Changes the information shown on the front panel display
(page 26).
AUDIO
V-AUX
Tuner keys
INTRODUCTION
c
e
English
7 En
Part names and functions
Simplified remote control
Use the supplied simplified remote control to make basic controls of this unit. Keys on the simplified remote control
function as well as the identical keys on the main remote control (page 6).
Note
• Before using the simplified remote control or replacing the battery, make sure that you read “Notes on remote controls and batteries” in the “Caution”
section.
■
POWER
SLEEP
Replacing the battery of the simplified
remote control
Change the battery when the operation range of the
simplified remote control decreases.
SCENE
BD
DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
INPUT
ON SCREEN
OPTION
VOLUME
ENTER
MUTE
RETURN
TAG
DISPLAY
PRG SELECT
PRESET
Remove the insulation sheet
y
• To select an input source, press INPUT l / h repeatedly.
• The printings “TAG” and “PRG SELECT” are for U.S.A. model.
■ Setting the controlling zone
Follow the procedure below to select an amplifier (main,
Zone2 or Zone3) to be operated by the simplified remote
control (page 60).
Zone to select
Procedure
Main
Press and hold h (right of ENTER) and
BD/DVD for more than 3 seconds.
Zone2
Press and hold h (right of ENTER) and TV
for more than 3 seconds.
Zone3
Press and hold h (right of ENTER) and CD
for more than 3 seconds.
■ Setting the remote control ID
Follow the procedure below to set the remote control ID of
the simplified remote control. For details about remote
control ID, see page 64.
Zone to select
Procedure
ID1
Press and hold l (left of ENTER) and BD/
DVD for more than 3 seconds.
ID2
Press and hold l (left of ENTER) and TV
for more than 3 seconds.
8 En
Use a straight
pin to remove
the cover.
Replace the
battery with a
new CR2025
battery.
Close the
cover.
Quick start guide
When you use this product for the first time, perform setup following the steps below. See the related pages for details on
operations and settings.
Step 2: Set up your speakers
Prepare speakers, DVD player, cables, and other items
necessary for setup.
For example, prepare the following items for setting up a
7.1-channel sound system.
Front right speaker
☞P. 10
☞P. 11
y
Subwoofer
Front left
speaker
• Placing speakers
• Connecting speakers
Surround right speaker
• This unit has a YPAO (Yamaha Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer)
that automatically optimizes this unit based on room acoustic
characteristics (audio characteristics of the speakers, speaker positions,
and room acoustics, etc.).
You can enjoy good balanced sound without special knowledge by using
the YPAO technology (☞P. 21).
Step 3: Connect your components
PREPARATION
Video monitor
Place your speakers in the room and connect them to this
unit.
INTRODUCTION
Step 1: Prepare items for setup
Connect your TV, DVD player, or other components.
Surround Back
right speaker
Components
(such as DVD player)
Surround Back
left speaker
Surround left speaker
Speakers
qty.
2
Center speaker
1
Surround speaker
2
Surround back
speaker
2
Active subwoofer
1
Speaker cable
7
Subwoofer cable
1
Reproduction component such as DVD player
1
Video monitor such as TV
1
Video cable or HDMI cable
2
Audio cable
2
• The priority of the requirement of other speakers is as follows:
1 Two surround speakers
2 One center speaker
3 One (or two) surround back speaker(s)
• Video and audio cables are unnecessary if you use HDMI cables.
☞P. 18
☞P. 19
☞P. 20
Step 4: Turn on the power
Connect the power cable and turn on this unit.
• Connecting the power cable
• Turning this unit on and off
☞P. 20
☞P. 20
Step 5: Select the input source and start
playback
Select the component connected in step 3 as an input
source and start playback.
• Basic procedure
• Selecting sound field programs
☞P. 24
☞P. 27
y
• This unit supports the SCENE function (page 24) that changes the input
source and sound field program at one time. Four scenes are preset for
different purposes for Blu-ray disc, DVD and CD, and you can select
from a scene from those just by pressing a remote control key.
APPENDIX
y
☞P. 18
☞P. 18
☞P. 19
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Front speaker
☞P. 14
☞P. 16
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Requirements
• Connecting a TV monitor or projector
• Connecting other components
• Connecting a multi-format player or an
external decoder
• Connecting an external amplifier
• Connecting a USB storage device
• Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
• Connecting to the network
• Connecting the FM and AM antennas
BASIC
OPERATION
Center
speaker
English
9 En
PREPARATION
Connections
Placing speakers
This unit supports up to 7.1-channel surround. We recommend the following speaker layout in order to obtain the
optimum surround effect.
7.1-channel speaker layout
Speaker channels
C
FR
FL
SW
SW
30˚
SL
SR
60˚
80˚
SL
SR
SBL
SBR
30 cm (12 in) or more
6.1-channel speaker layout
C
FR
FL
SW
SW
■ Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the front channel sounds
(stereo sound) and effect sounds. Place these speakers at
an equal distance from the ideal listening position. Adjust
the height of the TV or screen so that about 1/4 of the
screen from the bottom is aligned with the tweeters of the
front speakers.
■ Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). Place it halfway between the left and
right speakers. When using a TV, place the speaker just
above or just under the center of the TV with the front
surfaces of the TV and the speaker aligned. When using a
screen, place it just under the center of the screen.
■ Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place them at the rear left and rear right facing the
listening position. To obtain a natural sound flow in the
5.1-channel speaker layout, place them slightly further
back than in the 7.1-channel speaker layout.
30˚
■
SL
SR
60˚
SL
80˚
SR
SB
5.1-channel speaker layout
C
FR
FL
SW
SW
30˚
SL
SR
60˚
SL
10 En
80˚
SR
Surround back left and right speakers (SBL
and SBR) / Surround back speaker (SB)
The surround back left and right speakers are used for rear
effect sounds. Place them at the rear of the room facing the
listening position at least 30 cm (1 ft) away from each
other, ideally at the same distance as that between the
front left and right speakers.
In the 6.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and
right channel sound signals are mixed down and output
from the single surround back speaker.
In the 5.1-channel speaker layout, surround back left and
right channel sound signals are output from the surround
left and right speakers.
■ Subwoofer (SW)
The subwoofer speaker is used for bass sounds and lowfrequency effect (LFE) sounds included in Dolby Digital
and DTS signals. Use a subwoofer with a built-in
amplifier, such as the Yamaha Active Servo Processing
Subwoofer System. Place it exterior to the front left and
right speakers facing slightly inward to reduce reflections
from a wall.
Connections
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
PL
PR
1/4 from
bottom
FL
FR
1.8 m
(6 ft)
1.8 m
(6 ft)
C
INTRODUCTION
■ Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR)
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the
front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by the
sound field programs (page 27). We recommend that you
use the presence speakers especially for the CINEMA
DSP sound field programs. To use the presence speakers,
connect the speakers to SP1 terminals and then set “Extra
Speaker Assignment” to “Presence” (page 49).
Connecting speakers
y
• You can connect Zone2/3 speakers to the EXTRA SP (SP1/SP2) terminals (page 59).
• You can connect up to two subwoofers. When two subwoofers are connected, the same sound is output from them.
b
a
e
d
k
j
BASIC
OPERATION
k
NETWORK
j
b
HDMI 4
3
PREPARATION
Connect your speakers to the respective terminals according to your speaker layout. The following illustration shows how
to connect speakers for 7.1-channel speaker layout.
a
c
SP1
ZONE2/PRESENCE
SPEAKERS
SINGLE
E
CLASS 2 WIRING
CABLAGE
CLASSE 2
h
i
d
g
f
FRONT
CENTER
SINGLE
SUBWOOFER
AUDIO
OUT
ZONE2
OUT
ZONE3
OUT
g
c
Speakers
Jacks on this unit
FRONT
SURROUND
CENTER
SUR. BACK
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
SUR.BACK
H INPUT
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
SURROUND
CENTER
1 SUBWOOFER 2
PRE OUT
f
ADVANCED
OPERATION
e
h
i
6.1-channel
5.1-channel
FRONT (L)
✔
✔
✔
b Front right
FRONT (R)
✔
✔
✔
c Center
CENTER
✔
✔
✔
d Surround left
SURROUND (L)
✔
✔
✔
e Surround right
SURROUND (R)
✔
✔
✔
f Surround back left
(Surround back for 6.1-channel)
SURROUND BACK (L)
(SINGLE)
✔
✔
g Surround back right
SURROUND BACK (R)
✔
h Subwoofer 1
SUBWOOFER 1
✔
✔
APPENDIX
7.1-channel
a Front left
✔
SUBWOOFER 2
Option
Option
Option
SP1 (L)
Option
Option
Option
k Presence right
SP1 (R)
Option
Option
Option
11 En
English
i Subwoofer 2
j Presence left
Connections
Caution
• A speaker cable is a pair of insulated cables running side by side in general. One of the cables is colored differently
or striped to indicate a polarity. Connect one end of the colored/striped cable to the “+” (red) terminal of this unit
and the other end to that of your speaker, and connect one end of the other cable to the “–” (black) terminal of this
unit and the other end to that of your speaker.
• Before connecting the speakers, be sure to disconnect the power cable.
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or
speakers. If the circuit shorts out, “CHECK SP WIRES!” appears on the front panel display when this unit is turned
on.
• If images on the monitor (CRT) are distorted, place the speakers away from the video monitor.
• Use speakers with an impedance of 6-ohm or larger. Set speaker impedance in the advanced setup menu before
connecting the speakers (page 63). You can also use 4-ohm speakers as the front speakers when you set “SP IMP.” to
“6ΩMIN”.
■
Connecting speaker cables
1
Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of
insulation from the end of each speaker
cable and then twist bare wires of the cable
together so that they will not cause a short
circuits.
■ Using bi-amplification connections
If you do not connect surround back speakers, you can use
the SURROUND BACK/BI-AMP jacks to make biamplification connections to one speaker system which
supports bi-amplification connection as shown below.
To activate the connections, set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in the
advanced setup menu (page 63).
Front speakers
Right
10 mm (0.4 in)
2
Left
Loosen the knob, insert the twisted bare
wires into the hole and then tighten the knob.
This unit
2
FRONT
1
Black: negative (–)
3
Connecting the banana plug (Except Korea,
U.K., Europe, Russia and Asia models)
Tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug into
the end of the terminal.
Banana plug
12 En
SURROUND BACK/
BI-AMP
Red: positive (+)
Caution
Before making bi-amplification connections, remove
any brackets or cables that connect a woofer with a
tweeter. Refer to the instruction manuals of speakers for
details.
When not making bi-amplification connections, make
sure that the brackets or cables are connected before
connecting the speaker cables.
Note
• You cannot use surround back speakers or extra speakers (presence and
Zone2 speakers) when bi-amplification connections are made.
Connections
Information on jacks and cable plugs
■
■
Audio jacks
Jack and cables
Analog audio jacks
(white)
Description
To transmit conventional analog
stereo audio signals. Use stereo pin
cables.
Video/audio jacks
Jack and cables
HDMI jacks
HDMI
Description
To transmit digital video and
digital audio signals. Use HDMI
cables.
INTRODUCTION
This unit has the following input and output jacks. Use jacks and cables appropriate for components that you are
connecting.
HDMI
y
R
(red)
COAXIAL jacks
To transmit coaxial digital audio
signals. Use pin cables.
(orange)
• We recommend that you use a commercially available 19-pin HDMI
cable no longer than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit
to other DVI components.
• You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection
(page 44).
PREPARATION
L
C
OPTICAL jacks
BASIC
OPERATION
COAXIAL
To transmit optical digital audio
signals. Use optical fiber cables.
O
OPTICAL
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■
Video jacks
Jack and cables
VIDEO jacks
VIDEO
V
Description
To transmit conventional
composite video signals. Use pin
cables.
S VIDEO jack
S VIDEO
S
COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PR
PR
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
(yellow)
To transmit S-video signals that
include luminance (Y) and
Cameroonians (C) components.
Use an S-video cable.
To transmit component video
signals that include luminance (Y),
chrominance blue (PB) and
chrominance red (PR) components.
Use component video cables.
APPENDIX
(red)
PB
PB
(blue)
Y
Y
(green)
English
13 En
Connections
Connecting a TV monitor or projector
According to the types of video input jacks available on your video monitor (such as a TV or projector), choose one of
the connection methods as shown below. When you connect video players such as a DVD player to this unit with an
HDMI connection, connect your video monitor to this unit with an HDMI connection.
Note
• Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
■
If your video monitor has an HDMI input jack
■
TV
If your video monitor does not have HDMI
input jacks but component video input jacks
TV
a
c
Y
HDMI
PB
PR
TRIGGER OUT
1
2
12V
0.1A MAX.
TRIGGER OUT
1
2
12V
HDMI OUT 1
(HDMI CONTROL)
HDMI OUT 2
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
0.1A MAX.
HDMI 3
HDMI OUT
2
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 3
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
REMOTE
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
IN
REMOTE
GND
PR
OUT
P
IN
VIDEO
OUT
VIDEO
PB
HDMI
Y
b
Projector
Jacks on components
Jacks on this unit
a HDMI input
HDMI OUT 1
b HDMI input
HDMI OUT 2
y
• This unit is equipped with two HDMI OUT jacks. You can select the
active HDMI OUT jack(s) by pressing gHDMI OUT (page 42).
• This unit supports the HDMI control function (page 42). If your TV
supports the HDMI control function, connect the TV to the HDMI OUT
1 jack to control this unit with the remote control of your TV.
Jacks on components
c Component video output
■
Jacks on this unit
MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO)
If your video monitor has neither HDMI nor
component video input jacks
TV
d
V
TRIGGER OUT
1
2
12V
0.1A MAX.
HDMI OUT
2
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
MONITOR
O
O OUT
COMPONENT
REMOTE
IN
OUT
VIDEO
VIDEO
Jacks on components
d Video input (composite)
14 En
Jacks on this unit
MONITOR OUT (VIDEO)
Connections
Outputting TV sounds from this unit
INTRODUCTION
To output sound of a TV from this unit, make connection
between one of the AV 1-6 jacks of this unit and an audio
output jack of the TV.
If the TV supports an optical digital output, we
recommend that you use the AV 1 jack. Connecting to the
AV 1 jack allows you to switch an input source to the AV 1
jack with a just a single key operation using the SCENE
function (page 24).
TV
PREPARATION
Digital output
(optical)
PR
BASIC
OPERATION
PR
PB
PB
VIDEO
Y
O
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 2
AV 3
( TV )
A 1
AV
(CD)
AV 6
AV
OUT
AUDIO1
AUD
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
English
15 En
Connections
Connecting other components
This unit has input and output terminals for respective input and output sources. You can reproduce sound and movies
from input sources selected with the front panel display or remote control.
Note
• Make sure that this unit and other components are unplugged from the AC wall outlets.
Audio input (PHONO)
Audio / video output (AV OUT)
RS- 232C
TRIGGER OUT
1
2
12V
N
0.1A MAX.
DOCK
HDMI OUT 1
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
HDMI OUT 2
(HDMI CONTROL)
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 4
HDMI 3
HDMI input
(HDMI 1-4)
PHONO
OUT
Audio output
(DIGITAL AUDIO)
COMPONENT
VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
ANTENNA
S VIDEO
UNBAL.
FM
REMOTE
GND AM
PR
IN
PR
GND
OPTICAL
OUT
DIGITAL
AUDIO
VIDEO
PB
PB
VIDEO
Y
Y
FRONT
CENTER
Audio output
(AUDIO OUT)
Audio / video input
(AV 1-6)
OPTICAL
COAXIAL
COAXIAL
AV 2
AV 3
( TV )
AV 1
OPTICAL
(CD)
AV 4
AV 6
AV 5
AV
OUT
FRONT
AUDIO1
AUDIO2
Audio input (AUDIO 1/2)
■
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
AUDIO
OUT
ZON
OU
Multi channel audio input (MULTI CH INPUT)
Audio and video player / Set-top box
External
component
External component
with HDMI output
Signal
Audio/Video
Output jacks on
components
HDMI output
Input jacks on this unit
HDMI 1 (BD/DVD)
HDMI 2
HDMI 3
HDMI 4
External component
with component video
output
Audio
Optical digital output
Video
Component video output
Audio
Coaxial digital output
Video
Component video output
External component
with S-video output
Audio
Analog audio output
Video
S-video output
External component
with composite video
output
Audio
Coaxial digital output
Video
Composite output
Audio
Optical digital output
16 En
Video
Composite output
Audio
Analog audio output
Video
Composite output
Audio
Analog audio output
Video
Composite output
AV 1 (TV)
OPTICAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 2
COAXIAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
AV 5
Analog audio
S VIDEO
AV 3 (CD)
COAXIAL
VIDEO
AV 4
OPTICAL
AV 5
Analog audio
VIDEO
VIDEO
AV 6
Analog audio
VIDEO
Connections
y
■
Audio player
External component
Output jacks on
components
Input jacks on this unit
Optical digital output
AV 1 (TV)
AV 4
OPTICAL
External component with coaxial digital
output
Coaxial digital output
AV 2
COAXIAL
AV 3 (CD)
COAXIAL
External component with analog audio
output
Analog audio output
AV 5
Analog audio
AV 6
Analog audio
AUDIO 1
Analog audio
Analog audio output
AUDIO 2
Analog audio
PHONO
Analog audio
y
• If your CD player has a coaxial digital output jack, connect it to the AV3 jack of this unit. In this case, you can use the SCENE function (page 24) with the
initial factory settings.
• When connecting a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier.
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal.
■
ADVANCED
OPERATION
About audio/video output jacks
When using the AV OUT jacks: connect these jacks to composite video and analog audio input jacks of an external
component.
When using the AUDIO OUT jacks: connect these jacks to analog audio input jacks of an external component.
When using the DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL OUT) jack: connect this jack to optical digital input jack of an
external component.
BASIC
OPERATION
Turntable
OPTICAL
PREPARATION
External component with optical digital
output
INTRODUCTION
• Input jacks in parentheses indicate the jacks to which the SCENE function (page 24) is assigned by the initial factory settings. To use the SCENE function
with the initial factory settings, connect external components that support the SCENE function to these jacks.
• You can change the name of the input source displayed on the front panel display as necessary (page 53).
• See page 58 on how to use the ZONE2/3 OUT jacks.
• When you connect an external component with analog audio and component video (or composite) output jacks, connect the analog audio output to the
AUDIO 1 or AUDIO 2 jacks of this unit while making a video connection (component video or composite). Then select the video to be output when
“AUDIO 1” or “AUDIO 2” is selected as the input source (page 45).
Internal signal flow
Note
• The AV OUT (composite video) jack only outputs video signals input to
the composite video input jacks.
Input
Output
HDMI
HDMI OUT
HDMI
Audio signal flow
Notes
• Audio signals input to the HDMI input jacks are output from either the
speaker terminals or HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks depending on the “Audio
Output” setting (page 51).
• The DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL OUT) jack outputs digital audio
signals only when signals are input to the optical or coaxial optical input
jacks and corresponding input source is selected.
Input
Output
HDMI
HDMI OUT
HDMI
OUT
PR
OPTICAL
PR
PB
PB
Y
Y
APPENDIX
Optical
digital
Component
video
OPTICAL
Coaxial
digital
COAXIAL
S VIDEO
Analog
S-video
VIDEO
VIDEO
MULTI CH INPUT
English
Composite
video
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Video signal flow
This unit automatically converts input video signals and
outputs the signals to the HDMI OUT jacks and
MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO and VIDEO)
jacks (video conversion).
Speaker
terminals
17 En
Connections
■
Connecting a multi-format player or an
external decoder
This unit is equipped with 8 additional input jacks (Front
L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround Back L/R and
Subwoofer) for analog multi-channel input from a multiformat player, external decoder, etc.
Notes
• When you select “MULTI CH” as the input source, the digital sound field
processor is automatically disabled.
• Since this unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks to accommodate for missing speakers, connect at least a 5.1channel speaker system when using this feature.
• You can specify a video signal to be output during a multi-channel audio
reproduction (page 45). If your DVD player has analog multi-channel
output jacks, connect them to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks while making
a video connection (component video or composite).
e
SUBWOOFER PRE OUT 1/2 jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.
■ Transmitting/receiving remote control signals
When the components have the capability of the
transmission of the remote control signals, connect the
REMOTE IN and REMOTE OUT jacks to the remote
control input and output jack with the monaural analog
mini cable as follows.
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
HDMI 4
HDMI 3
BD/DVD)
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
CENTER
REMOTE
PR
IN
OUT
VIDEO
PB
FRONT
SURROUND
SUR.BACK
SUBWOOFER
Y
MULTI CH INPUT
L
R
L
R
R
Remote
control out
L
Center out
Subwoofer out
Surround
back out
Surround
out
Front out
Multi-format player or external decoder
(7.1-channel output)
■ Connecting an external amplifier
If you want to use another amplifier, connect an external
amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Each PRE OUT jack
outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding
speaker terminals.
Note
• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make any
connections to the speaker terminals.
a
b
c
SINGLE
FRONT
SURROUND
d
CENTER
SUR. BACK
Remote
control in
Infrared signal
receiver or Yamaha
component
IR flasher or
Yamaha component
(CD or DVD player, etc.)
y
• If connecting a Yamaha component that supports the SCENE control
signal reception to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, you can start
playback on the Yamaha component by using the SCENE function
(page 24).
• If connecting a component other than Yamaha products to the REMOTE
OUT jack of this unit, set “SCENE IR” to “OFF” in the advanced setup
menu (page 63).
Connecting a Yamaha iPod universal
dock or Bluetooth™ wireless audio
receiver
This unit has the DOCK terminal, to which you can
connect a Yamaha iPod universal dock (YDS-11, sold
separately) or a Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (YBA10, sold separately). You can play an iPod or a Bluetooth
component with this unit by connecting it to the DOCK
terminal.
1 SUBWOOFER 2
PRE OUT
e
RS-232C
a
FRONT PRE OUT jacks
b
SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
c
SUR.BACK PRE OUT jacks
Front channel output jacks.
DOCK
HDMI OUT 1
(HDMI CONTROL)
TRIGGER O
1
2
HDMI OUT 2
HD
(BD
Surround channel output jacks.
Surround back output jacks. When you only connect one
external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to
the left SUR.BACK (SINGLE) jack.
PHONO
OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
y
• To output surround back channel signals at these jacks, set
“Surround Speaker” to any parameter except “None” (page 49).
d
CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel output jack.
18 En
Yamaha iPod universal dock or
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
ANTENNA
UNBAL.
FM
PR
OPTICAL
S VIDEO
GND
GND
Connections
Connecting to the network
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks
Use either the HDMI IN jack or analog AUDIO/VIDEO
jacks on the front panel to connect a game console,
camcorder or digital camera to this unit. Be sure to turn
down the volume of this unit and other components before
making connections.
Note
• When signals are input to the HDMI IN and analog input jacks (AUDIO
L/R and VIDEO) at the same time, the HDMI connection has a priority.
PREPARATION
Notes
SCENE
• Use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable (commercially available) to
connect a network hub or router and this unit.
• If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to
configure the network settings manually (page 53).
BD/DVD
TV
RADIO
CD
INPUT
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
VIDEO AUX
OPTIMIZER MIC
EFFECT
VIDEO
AUDIO
HDMI IN
Internet
VIDEO
L
AUDIO R
V
L
R
INTRODUCTION
To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a
network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the
NETWORK port of this unit, and plug the other end into
one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server
function. To enjoy Internet Radio or music files saved on
your PC, each device must be connected properly in the
network.
HDMI IN
WAN
BASIC
OPERATION
HDMI
HDMI output
Analog audio
output
Video output
PC
LAN
Modem
Router
TRIGGER OUT
1
2
12V
NETWORK
0.1A MAX.
2
HDMI 2
HDMI 1
(BD/DVD)
HDMI 3
Note
HDMI 4
• To protect against dust, attach the supplied VIDEO AUX input cover to
the VIDEO AUX jacks when you do not use the jacks. To remove the
cover, push the right section of it.
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
REMOTE
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Game console, camcorder
or digital camera
Network cable
IN
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Connecting a USB storage device
VOLUME
ORY
BAND
l
Connect a USB memory device or USB portable audio
player to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. For
information about USB storage devices supported by this
unit, see page 38.
TUNIN
G
h
INPUT
OPTIMIZE
R MIC
VIDEO
AUX
VIDEO
AUDIO
SCENE
HDMI IN
BD/DVD
TV
RADIO
CD
PROGRAM
MAIN ZONE
PHONES
USB
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
PURE DIRECT
Attach the cover
PUSH
ON/OFF
APPENDIX
EFFECT
SILENT CINEMA
VOLUME
ORY
USB
BAND
l
TUNIN
G
h
INPUT
OPTIMIZE
R MIC
VIDEO
AUX
PUSH
VIDEO
AUDIO
HDMI IN
English
USB memory device or
USB portable audio player
Remove the cover
19 En
Connections
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
An indoor FM antenna and an AM loop antenna are
supplied with this unit. Connect these antennas properly to
the respective jacks.
Indoor FM antenna
PHONO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
After all connections are complete, plug the supplied
power cable into the AC inlet and then plug it into an AC
wall outlet.
AM loop
antenna
(HDMI CONTROL)
OUT
Connecting the power cable
(BD/DVD)
S VIDEO
ANTENNA
UNBAL.
FM
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
AC IN
RE
GND AM
PR
IN
PR
GND
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO
OUT
PB
VIDEO
PB
VIDEO
Y
Y
To the AC wall outlet
Ground (GND terminal)
The GND terminal is for noise reduction.
y
• The supplied antennas are normally sensitive enough to obtain good
reception.
• Position the AM loop antenna away from this unit.
• If you cannot get good reception, we recommend that you use an outdoor
antenna. For details, consult the nearest authorized Yamaha dealer or
service center.
• Always use the AM loop antenna even when the outdoor antenna is
connected.
Turning this unit on and off
1
Press LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front
panel (or pPOWER on the remote control)
to turn on this unit.
2
Press LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF (or
pPOWER) again to turn off this unit
(standby mode).
Assembling the AM loop antenna
y
• The unit needs a few seconds until ready to play back.
• You can also turn on this unit by pressing RSCENE (or hSCENE).
• This unit consumes a small amount of electricity even in the standby
mode. We recommend disconnecting the power cable from the AC wall
outlet.
Connecting the AM loop antenna
The wires of the AM loop antenna have no polarity. You
can connect either wire to the AM terminal and the other
to the GND terminal.
Press and hold
20 En
Insert
Release
Caution
Do not unplug this unit while it is turned on. Doing so
may damage this unit or cause the settings of this unit
to be saved incorrectly.
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
2
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the UOPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
INPUT
VIDEO AUX
OPTIMIZER MIC
VIDEO
AUDIO
PREPARATION
Caution
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be
output during the “Auto Setup” procedure. Do not
allow small children to enter the room during the
procedure.
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as
quiet as possible while the “Auto Setup” procedure is
in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the
results may not be satisfactory.
INTRODUCTION
This unit has a Yamaha Parametric Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO). With the YPAO, this unit automatically adjusts the
output characteristics of your speakers based on speaker position, speaker performance, and the acoustic characteristics
of the room. We recommend that you first adjust the output characteristics with the YPAO when you use this unit.
HDMI IN
y
• You can manually adjust the output characteristics of your speakers
with “Manual Setup” in the Setup menu (page 48).
Optimizer microphone
1
Auto Setup
Extra Speaker Assignment
Zone2
Zone2+Zone3
Presence
None
EQ Type
Flat
Front
Natural
Start
Move focus
Start
y
• You can bring up the above menu screen from the Setup menu (page 48).
3
Optimizer microphone
MIN
MAX
MIN
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
VOLUME
Place the optimizer microphone at your
normal listening position on a flat level
surface with the omni-directional
microphone heading upward.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Check the following points.
Before starting the automatic setup, check the
following.
• All speakers and subwoofer are connected
properly.
• Headphones are disconnected from this unit.
• The video monitor is connected properly.
• This unit and the video monitor are turned on.
• This unit is selected as the video input source of the
video monitor.
• The connected subwoofer is turned on and the
volume level is set to about half way (or slightly
less).
• The crossover frequency controls of the connected
subwoofer are set to the maximum.
“MIC ON. View GUI MENU” appears on the front panel
display.
The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.
BASIC
OPERATION
Using Auto Setup
MAX
Subwoofer
APPENDIX
y
• It is recommended that you use a tripod or something similar to fix the
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when
seated in your listening position. You can fix the optimizer microphone to
the tripod with the attaching screw of the tripod.
English
21 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
4
5
When measurement is successfully completed,
“YPAO Complete” appears on the front panel display
and the measurement result appears on the GUI
screen.
When the speakers are connected to EXTRA
SP terminals, press jCursor k repeatedly
to select “Extra Speaker Assignment” and
then press jCursor l / h to select how to
use EXTRA SP terminals from “Zone2”,
“Zone2+Zone3”, “Presence” or “None”.
If this unit does not work when you press jCursor,
press iON SCREEN once and then operate this
unit.
To select sound characteristics for
adjustment, press jCursor n to select “EQ
Type” and then press jCursor l / h.
If this unit does not work when you press jCursor,
press iON SCREEN once and then operate this
unit.
This unit has a parametric equalizer that adjusts the
output levels for each frequency range. The equalizer
is adjusted to produce a cohesive sound field based on
automatically measured speaker characteristics.
In “EQ Type”, you can select the following
parametric equalizer characteristics suitable for the
desired sound characteristics.
Flat
This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same
characteristics. Select this if your speakers have
similar qualities.
Front
This adjusts each speaker to obtain the same
characteristics as the front left and right speakers.
Select this if your front left and right speakers have
significantly better qualities than the other speakers.
Auto Setup
Result
Speaker Config : 3 /4 / 0.1
Distance (Min / Max) : 3.00m / 10.50m
Level (Min / Max) : -3.5dB / +4.5dB
Set
Finish
Select items
Speaker Config
Displays the number of speakers connected to this unit in
the following order:
Total of Front and Center/Total of Surround and Surround
Back/Subwoofer
Distance (Min / Max)
Displays the speaker distance from the listening position
in the following order:
Closest speaker distance/Farthest speaker distance
Level (Min / Max)
Displays the speaker output levels in the following order:
Lowest speaker output level/Highest speaker output level
Notes
• If “Error” appears on the GUI screen during “Auto Setup”, measurement
is canceled and the type of error is displayed. For details, see “When an
error message is displayed during measurement” (page 23).
• If problems occur during measurement, “Check xx warning(s)” (xx
indicates the number of warnings) appears in red. For details, see “When
a warning message is displayed after measurement” (page 23).
7
Natural
This adjusts all speakers to achieve natural sound.
Select this if sounds in the high frequency range seem
too strong when “EQ Type” is set to “Flat”.
6
Cancel
Press jENTER to confirm the settings.
To cancel the operation, press jCursor l / h to
select “Cancel” and press jENTER.
The speaker characteristics are adjusted according to
measurement results.
When the following screen appears, remove the
optimizer microphone. “Auto Setup” is now
complete.
Press jCursor n to select “Start” and then
press jENTER to start the setup procedure.
A countdown starts and a measurement starts in 10
seconds. A loud test tone is output during
measurement.
Auto Setup
Auto Setup Completed !
Please disconnect the micorphone
(Then this screen will automatically disappear)
Notes
• During the automatic setup procedure, do not perform any
operation on this unit.
• Press jCursor k to cancel the automatic setup procedure.
Measurement takes about 3 minutes. To obtain precise
results, stay where you will not disturb the
measurement, such as to the side of or behind the
speakers or outside the room.
Return
The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Store it
in a cool place and away from direct sunlight after
measurement. Do not leave it in a place where it will be
subjected to high temperatures such on an AV
component.
y
• If you do not want to apply the measurement results, select “Cancel”.
• Perform “Auto Setup” again if you change the number or positions of
speakers.
22 En
Optimizing the speaker setting for your listening room (YPAO)
When an error message is displayed
during measurement
INTRODUCTION
If an error is detected during measurement, the
measurement is canceled and “Error” appears on the GUI
screen. Check the error and solve the problem. For details
on each error message, see page 74.
Press jCursor n once, press jCursor l / h
to select “Retry” or “Exit” and then press
jENTER.
PREPARATION
Error
E-1 : No Front Speakers
FrontL/R channel signals are not detected.
Check wiring and connections of the front L/R speakers.
Retry
Exit
Move focus
BASIC
OPERATION
Retry
Performs “Auto Setup” again.
Exit
Terminates the measurement and “Auto Setup”.
y
ADVANCED
OPERATION
• When “E-5:NOISY” appears, you can continue measurement. To
continue measurement, select “Proceed”. However, we recommend that
you solve the problem first and then perform measurement again.
When a warning message is displayed
after measurement
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
If a problem occurs during measurement, “Check xx
warning(s)” appears on the GUI screen. Check the
warning and solve the problem. For details on each
warning message, see page 75.
Auto Setup
Result
Speaker Config : 3 /4 / 0.1
Distance (Min / Max) : 3.00m / 10.50m
Level (Min / Max) : -3.5dB / +4.5dB
Check 2 warnings
Set
Cancel
See details
Select items
APPENDIX
y
• Optimization will not be performed while a warning message is
displayed. We recommend that you solve the problem and perform “Auto
Setup” again.
Press jCursor n / k to select “Check xx
warning(s)” and then press jENTER.
Details of the warning message are displayed. If there
are multiple warning messages, you can display the
next message using jCursor h.
2
To return to the top result display, press
jENTER again.
English
1
23 En
BASIC OPERATION
Playback
Basic procedure
Note
When you play back a DTS-CD, noise may be output in some
conditions, which may cause a speaker malfunction. Make sure
that the volume is set to low before starting playback. If noise is
output, do the following.
1
Turn on external components (TV, DVD
player, etc.) connected to this unit.
2
Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
dInput selection key) to select an input
source.
If you press dUSB/NET on the remote control,
press wSub-input selection key to select a
sub-input source.
The name of the selected input source is displayed for
a few seconds.
Input source name
1) When only noise is output
If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this unit,
only noise is output. Connect the playback component to this
unit by digital connection and play back the DTS-CD. If the
condition is not improved, the problem may results from the
playback component. Consult the manufacturer of the
playback component.
2) When noise is output during playback or skip operation
Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Option menu
after selecting the input source and set “Decoder Mode” to
“DTS” (page 43).
VOL.
Using the SCENE function
AV1
y
• If you connect two video monitors to the HDMI OUT jacks of this
unit, press gHDMI OUT repeatedly to select the active video
monitor(s) (page 42).
• You can also select an input source from the GUI screen (page 25).
• You can change the input source name displayed on the front panel
display or GUI screen as necessary (page 53).
3
4
Play the external component that you have
selected as the source input, or select a radio
station on the tuner.
Refer to the operating instructions of the external
component for details on playback. For selecting
radio stations or playback of an iPod, Bluetooth
component, USB storage device or network contents
using this unit, see the following.
• FM/AM radio tuning (page 31)
• iPod playback (page 35)
• Bluetooth component playback (page 37)
• USB storage device playback (page 38)
• Internet Radio playback (page 41)
• PC playback (page 39)
Keys
Input source
Sound field program
BD/DVD
HDMI 1
Straight
TV
AV 1
Straight
CD
AV 3
Straight
RADIO
TUNER
7ch Enhancer
y
• When this unit is on standby, you can turn on this unit by pressing
RSCENE (or hSCENE).
• If you connect a Yamaha DVD/CD player that has the capability of the
SCENE control signals to the REMOTE OUT jack of this unit, you can
start playback on the player by using the SCENE function.
Selecting a SCENE
Press RSCENE (or hSCENE).
Turn the KVOLUME control (or press
tVOLUME +/–) to adjust the volume.
y
• You can also select a SCENE from the GUI screen (page 25).
Volume
Registering input source/sound field
program to SCENE
VOL.
Volume-18.5dB
This unit has a SCENE function that allows you to change
input sources and sound field programs with one key. Four
scenes are available for different usages, such as playing
movies or music. The following input sources and sound
field programs are provided as the initial factory settings.
L
SL
SW
C
R
SR
Select the desired input source/sound field
program and then press and hold RSCENE (or
hSCENE) to edit until “SET Complete” appears
on the front panel display.
y
• If you change the input source setting, register the remote control code of
an external component to the input source (page 61).
24 En
Playback
Switching remotely controlled external
components linked to scene selections
1
Note
• This feature is not available for TUNER input source.
2
Selecting a source on the GUI screen
1
2
Press vMUTE again to resume audio
output.
Adjusting high/low frequency sounds
(tone control)
You can adjust the balance of the high frequency range
(Treble) and low frequency range (Bass) of sounds output
from the front left and right speakers to obtain desired
tone.
1
Press OTONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select “Treble” or “Bass”.
Treble
2
Rotate the PPROGRAM selector to adjust
the frequency range.
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
The display returns to the previous screen
automatically in few seconds.
Select Scene
Note
BD/DVD
TV
CD
RADIO
• The tone control settings are not effective when this unit is in the Pure
Direct mode or “MULTI CH” is selected as an input source.
2
Use jCursor k / n repeatedly to switch the
page and jCursor l / h repeatedly to
select the desired source.
Category
Source
BD/DVD, TV, CD, RADIO
Select Input
HDMI1-4, V-AUX, PHONO, MULTI CH,
DOCK, AV1-6, AUDIO1/2, USB, NET
RADIO, PC, TUNER
y
• If an input source you want to select is available in “Select Scene”, you
can select the desired input source and sound field program at once.
Press jENTER.
Press SPURE DIRECT (or rPURE DIRECT)
to turn the Pure Direct mode on or off.
SPURE DIRECT lights up when you set Pure Direct
mode on.
The following features are disabled in the Pure Direct
mode.
– sound field program, tone control
– display and operation of the Option menu and Setup
menu
– multi-zone function
APPENDIX
Select Scene
3
Use Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure high fidelity
sound of the selected source. When Pure Direct mode is
activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the
least circuitry.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Press iON SCREEN on the remote control.
The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.
0.0dB
BASIC
OPERATION
While holding down the desired hSCENE
key, press and hold the dInput selection
key to which you registered a remote control
code in step 1.
From now on the external component can be remotely
controllable just by selecting a scene.
Press vMUTE on the remote control to mute
the audio output.
PREPARATION
Register the remote control code of an
external component to the desired input
source (page 61).
1
INTRODUCTION
You can operate an external component with the remote
control of this unit by setting a remote control code for the
external component for each input source. Setting remote
control codes for desired input sources allows you to
switch between external components linked to scene
selections.
Muting audio output
y
• The font panel display automatically turns off while this unit in the Pure
Direct mode.
English
25 En
Playback
Input source
Using your headphones
Plug your headphones in the MPHONES jack on
the front panel.
When you select a sound field program while using the
headphones, the mode is automatically set to SILENT
CINEMA mode.
Notes
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker
terminals.
• When multi-channel signals are processed, sounds in all channels are
divided to left and right channels. When “MULTI CH” is selected as the
input source, only front L/R sounds are output from the headphones.
Changing information on the front
panel display
Press EINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly.
Available information differs depending on the selected
input source.
For example, if you select HDMI1 input and display “DSP
Program”, the following screen appears on the front panel
display.
Input source
Straight
Sound field program
Input source
Information
HDMI1-4
AV1-6
AUDIO1/2
V-AUX
PHONO
iPod (DOCK) (simple
remote mode)
BLUETOOTH (DOCK)
Input
DSP Program
Audio Decoder
MULTI CH
Input
TUNER
Frequency, DSP Program, Audio
Decoder
(for Radio Data System information)
Program Service, Program Type,
Radio Text, Clock Time, DSP
Program, Audio Decoder, Frequency
26 En
iPod (DOCK) (menu
browse mode)
USB (USB/NET)
PC (USB/NET)
Information
(on play information display)
DSP Program, Audio Decoder,
Song, Artist, Album
(on GUI screen)
List
NET RADIO (USB/NET)
(on play information display)
DSP Program, Audio Decoder,
Station Name
(on GUI screen)
List
Enjoying the sound field programs
This unit is also equipped with a Yamaha digital sound field processing (DSP) chip. You can enjoy multi-channel sounds
for almost all input sources using various sound field programs stored on the chip and a variety of surround decoders.
INTRODUCTION
Selecting sound field programs
■ Selecting a sound field program on the front panel
Rotate the PPROGRAM selector to select a desired sound field program.
PREPARATION
■ Selecting a sound field program with the remote control
Perform the following operations depending on the category of the sound field programs.
Sound field programs for movies/TV programs............................... Press rMOVIE repeatedly.
Sound field programs for music ....................................................... Press rMUSIC repeatedly.
Stereo reproduction .......................................................................... Press rSTEREO repeatedly.
Multi-channel stereo reproduction ................................................... Press rSTEREO repeatedly.
Compressed music enhancer ............................................................ Press rSTEREO repeatedly.
Surround decoder ............................................................................. Press rSUR.DECODE repeatedly.
For example, if you select “Sci-Fi”, the following screen appears on the front panel display.
Sound field program category
BASIC
OPERATION
Sci-Fi
Program name
Notes
Sound field program descriptions
y
• You can check what speakers are currently outputting signals with the speaker indicators on the front panel display (page 6).
• Each program can adjust sound field elements (sound field parameters). For details, see page 54.
•
in the table indicates the sound field program with CINEMA DSP (page 79).
For movie/TV program sources (MOVIE)
Program
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
This unit provides sound field programs for multiple categories including music, movies and stereo reproduction. Select
a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
• Sound field programs are stored for each input source. When you change the input source, the sound field program previously selected for that input
source is applied again.
• When you play back DTS Express sources or audio signals with sampling frequency of higher than 96 kHz, the straight decode mode (page 30) is
automatically selected.
• When you play back Dolby TrueHD sources with CINEMA DSP, another program may be automatically selected in specific cases.
• When you play back DTS-HD sources with CINEMA DSP, the DTS decoder is automatically selected.
Descriptions
Spectacle
This program represents the spectacular feeling of large-scale movie productions.
It reproduces a broad theater sound field matching the cinemascope and wider-screen movies with an excellent
dynamic range from very small to extremely large sound.
Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces the finely elaborated sound design of the latest science fiction and special effectsfeaturing movies. You can enjoy a variety of cinematographically created virtual spaces reproduced with clear
separation between dialog, sound effects and background music.
Adventure
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of action and adventure movies.
The sound field restrains reverberations but puts emphasis on reproducing a powerful space expanded widely to
the left and right. The reproduced depth is also restrained relatively to ensure the separation between audio
channels and the clarity of the sound.
27 En
English
This program creates a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic
positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an
ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.
APPENDIX
Standard
Enjoying the sound field programs
Program
Descriptions
Drama
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to
musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones
and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue
the listener even after long hours of viewing.
Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources such as a classic movie in an atmosphere of a
good old movie theater. The program produces the optimum expansion and reverberation to the original audio to
create a comfortable space with a certain sound depth.
Sports
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live
feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly at the center
while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence
in the stadium.
Action Game
This sound field has been suitable for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data
that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling
by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions.
Roleplaying Game
This sound field has been suitable for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for
movies and the sound field designs for “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during
play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game.
For audio music sources (MUSIC)
Program
Descriptions
Hall in Munich
This sound field simulates a concert hall with approximately 2500 seats in Munich, using stylish wood for the
interior finishing as normal standards for European concert halls. Fine, beautiful reverberations spread richly,
creating a calming atmosphere. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center left of the arena.
Hall in Vienna
This is an approximately 1700-seated, middle-sized concert hall with a shoebox shape that is traditional in Vienna.
Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections from all around the audience, producing a very
full, rich sound.
Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant
reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music.
Cellar Club
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field
features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
The Roxy Theatre
This is the sound field of a rock music live house in Los Angeles, with approximately 460 seats. The listener’s
virtual seat is at the center left of the hall.
The Bottom Line
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, that was a famous New York jazz club once. The floor
can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
Music Video
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener
can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals
and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a
big live hall.
For stereo reproduction (STEREO)
Program
2ch Stereo
Descriptions
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels.
y
• When multi-channel signals are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers.
28 En
Enjoying the sound field programs
For multi-channel stereo reproduction (STEREO)
Program
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit
downmixes the source to 2 channels and then outputs the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger
sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc.
Compressed Music Enhancer (ENHANCER)
Program
INTRODUCTION
7ch Stereo
Descriptions
Descriptions
Use this program to enhance the sound nearest to the original depth and width of the 2-channel or multi-channel
compression artifacts.
7ch Enhancer
Use this program to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo.
Surround decode mode (SUR. DECODE)
PREPARATION
Straight Enhancer
Select this program to playback sources with selected decoders. You can playback 2-channel sources on multi-channels.
Descriptions
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for movies. If your listening environment is as
follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.
• When the surround back speakers are not connected
• When headphones are connected
PLIIx Music /
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for music. If your listening environment is as
follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.
• When the surround back speakers are not connected
• When headphones are connected
PLIIx Game /
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) decoder suitable for games. If your listening environment is as
follows, you cannot select the Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder.
• When the surround back speakers are not connected
• When headphones are connected
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS decoder suitable for movies.
Neo:6 Music
DTS decoder suitable for music.
y
• An input source is played back in straight decode mode (page 30) when “MULTI CH” is selected as the input source.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Dolby Pro Logic decoder suitable for all kinds of sources.
PLIIx Movie /
PLII Movie
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Pro Logic
BASIC
OPERATION
Decoder
APPENDIX
English
29 En
Enjoying the sound field programs
Enjoying unprocessed input sources
(Straight decode mode)
In straight decode mode, sounds are reproduced without
sound field effect. 2-channel stereo sources are output
from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel
input sources are decoded straight into the appropriate
channels and multi-channel sounds are reproduced
without a sound field effect.
1
2
To enable straight decode mode, press
QSTRAIGHT (or rSTRAIGHT).
“Straight” appears on the front panel display.
To cancel straight decode mode, press
QSTRAIGHT (or rSTRAIGHT) again.
A sound field program name appears on the front
panel display, and sound is reproduced with that
sound field effect.
Enjoying sound field programs without
surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA
DSP)
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy DSP sound
field surround effects even without any surround speakers
by using virtual surround speakers. You can even enjoy
Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker
system that does not include a center speaker.
When “Surround Speaker” in the Setup menu is set to
“None” (page 49), this unit operates in Virtual CINEMA
DSP mode.
Note
• Virtual CINEMA DSP is not available in the following conditions even if
you set “Surround Speaker” to “None” (page 49).
– headphone plug is connected to the PHONES jack.
– 7ch Stereo of the field sound program is selected.
– Pure Direct mode or straight decode mode is used.
30 En
Enjoy sound field programs with
headphones (SILENT CINEMA™)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
sources with your headphones. SILENT CINEMA mode
is automatically selected when you connect the headphone
plug to the PHONES jack.
Note
• SILENT CINEMA mode is not available in the following conditions.
– 2ch Stereo of the sound field program is selected.
– Pure Direct mode or straight decode mode is selected.
Using CINEMA DSP 3D mode
CINEMA DSP 3D mode creates the intensive and
accurate stereoscopic sound field in the listening room.
To use this unit in CINEMA DSP 3D mode, presence
speakers are required. Connect the presence speakers to
the SP1 terminals, perform the following settings and then
select a CINEMA DSP related sound field program.
• Disconnect the headphones from the PHONES jack.
• Set “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Presence”
(page 49).
• Set “3D DSP” to “On” (page 55).
When the sound field program runs in CINEMA DSP 3D
mode, the 3D indicator on the front panel display lights
up.
FM/AM tuning
The FM/AM tuner of this unit provides the following two
modes for tuning.
4
Notes
■ Preset tuning mode
You can preset the frequencies of FM/AM stations by
registering them to specific numbers, and later just select
those numbers to tune in.
Note
• Adjust the FM/AM antennas connected to this unit for the best reception.
Tuning in to the desired FM/AM station
(Frequency tuning)
Registering FM/AM stations and
tuning in (Preset tuning)
You can register up to 40 FM/AM stations (Preset).
2
Press HBAND (or eFM or eAM) to select a
band.
The tuner automatically detects FM stations with strong
signals and registers up to 40 stations. To register AM
stations, use manual station preset.
3
Press ITUNING l / h (or eTUNING k /
n) to specify the frequency.
The TUNED indicator on the front panel display
lights up when the tuner is tuned in to a station. The
STEREO indicator also lights up if the program being
broadcasted is in stereo.
The frequency changes in the following manner according
to how you press ITUNING l / h (or eTUNING
k / n).
Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press sOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for “TUNER” is displayed
(page 43).
3
Select “Auto Preset” and then press
jENTER.
Auto Preset
Automatic station preset starts about 5 seconds later
from the lowest frequency upwards.
When you press and release the key
The tuner increases or decreases the frequency in steps.
Use this method when the tuner cannot receive strong
signals and stations are skipped during the search.
APPENDIX
When you press the key more than 1 second
The tuner searches the frequency of a station that is
detectable around the current frequency. This is effective
when the tuner can receive strong signals without any
interference. Once the search starts, release the key.
When you keep holding the key, the search continues even
when a station is detected. This is useful when you want to
tune in to a specific station.
1
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
FM92.50MHz
Note
• Only Radio Data System broadcasting stations are stored automatically
by automatic station preset.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
STEREO
TUNED
Registering stations by automatic station
preset
BASIC
OPERATION
Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
1
PREPARATION
• When you press lNumeric keys during preset tuning, a
preset number is selected. Set tuning mode to frequency tuning
mode using ITUNING l / h (or eTUNING k / n) prior to
the operation.
• “Wrong Station!” appears on the front panel display when you
enter a frequency that is out of receivable range. Make sure that the
entered frequency is correct.
• You do not need enter zero if it comes at the end of a decimal
number. For example, enter “925” for “92.50 MHz” or “94” for
“94.00 MHz”.
INTRODUCTION
■ Frequency tuning mode
You can tune in to a desired FM/AM station by searching
or specifying its frequency.
To tune in by direct frequency tuning, press
lNumeric keys to enter the frequency of
the station.
y
English
• You can switch between stereo and monaural for FM broadcast in the
Option menu (page 44).
31 En
FM/AM tuning
y
y
• You can select the preset number at which the preset starts by
pressing ePRESET k / n or jCursor k / n while “READY”
is displayed on the front panel display.
• To cancel registration, press jRETURN.
• To cancel registration, press jRETURN or leave this unit
without any operations for about 30 seconds.
Status
You can call preset stations registered by automatic station
preset or manual station preset.
01:FM87.50MHz
Preset number
Calling a preset station (Preset tuning)
Frequency
During the automatic station preset, “MEMORY”
appears in the front panel display each time a station
is registered.
When registration is complete, “FINISH” appears
and then the display returns to the Option menu.
To return the display to the original state, press
sOPTION.
Registering stations by manual station
preset
You can manually register FM stations with weak signals
or AM stations.
1
Tune in to the desired station (page 31).
2
Press GMEMORY (or eMEMORY).
“Manual Preset” appears on the front panel display,
followed soon by the preset number to which the
station will be registered.
Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n) to
select a preset number.
y
• Preset numbers to which no stations are registered are skipped.
• “No Presets” or “No Presets in Memory” is displayed if no stations are
registered.
• You can directly select a preset number by pressing lNumeric keys
while calling a preset station. “Empty” appears on the display if you
enter a preset number to which no station is registered. “Wrong Num.”
appears if you enter an invalid number.
• When you press lNumeric keys during normal tuning, a frequency
is entered. Set tuning mode to preset tuning mode using FPRESET l
/ h (or ePRESET k / n) prior to the operation.
Clearing preset stations
1
Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2
Press sOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for “TUNER” is displayed
(page 43).
3
Press jCursor k / n to select “Clear Preset”
and then press jENTER.
y
• By holding down GMEMORY (or eMEMORY) for more than
2 seconds, you can skip the following steps and automatically
register the selected station to an empty preset number (next to the
lastly-registered preset number).
3
Press FPRESET l / h (or ePRESET k / n)
to select the preset number to which the
station will be registered.
When you select a preset number to which no station
is registered, “Empty” appears. When you select a
preset number to which any station has been already
registered, the frequency of the station is displayed.
01:FM92.50MHz
Preset number
y
• To cancel the operation and return to the Option menu, press
jRETURN.
4
Press jCursor k / n to select a preset
number to reset and then press jENTER.
The preset station registered to the selected preset
number is cleared. To clear the registration of
multiple preset numbers, repeat step 4.
5
To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.
Frequency to be registered
01:Empty
Flashes
Preset
number
y
• You can also select a preset number using the lNumeric
keys.
4
Press GMEMORY (or eMEMORY).
When registration is complete, the display returns to
the original state.
32 En
Radio Data System tuning
Note
• The Radio Data System reception feature is only available in U.K., Europe and Russia models.
Displaying the Radio Data System
information
Frequency, preset number (if the selected station is
preset)
Back to “Program Service”
1
Display example (Program Type)
SPORT
y
BASIC
OPERATION
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• Frequency tuning (page 31)
• Preset tuning (page 32)
• You can also use the PTY Seek mode to tune into the desired Radio
Data System broadcasting station from the preset ones.
2
Press EINFO (or fINFO) repeatedly to
toggle the following Radio Data System
information display modes.
Program service name, frequency
Selecting the Radio Data System
program type (PTY Seek)
You can select the desired radio program by program type
from the all preset Radio Data System broadcasting
stations.
y
Program type, frequency
1
Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
dTUNER) to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
Radio Text
2
Press sOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for “TUNER” is displayed
(page 43).
3
Press jCursor k / n to select “PTY Seek”
and then press jENTER.
Radio text, frequency
Clock Time
APPENDIX
Clock time, frequency
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Program Type
• To select a radio program using PTY Seek, you must first register the
Radio Data System stations (page 31). “No Presets” or “No Presets in
Memory” is displayed if no stations are registered.
• You can also operate PTY Seek using the GUI screen.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Program Service
PREPARATION
You can display the 4 types of the Radio Data System
information (“Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio
Text” and “Clock Time”) in the front panel display.
Frequency
INTRODUCTION
Radio Data System is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. This unit can receive various
Radio Data System data such as “Program Service”, “Program Type”, “Radio Text”, “Clock Time” and “EON”
(enhanced other networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations.
DSP Program
Current sound field program (page 27), frequency
English
Audio Decoder
Current audio decoder (page 29), frequency
33 En
Radio Data System tuning
4
PressjCursor l / h to select a program
type for search.
PTY:SPORT
Program Type
You can select a program type from the following.
Program type
Description
NEWS
News
AFFAIRS
Current affairs
INFO
General information
SPORT
Sports
EDUCATE
Education
DRAMA
Drama
CULTURE
Culture
SCIENCE
Science
VARIED
Light entertainment
POP M
Popular music
ROCK M
Rock music
M.O.R. M
Middle-of-the-road music (easy
listening)
LIGHT M
Light classics
CLASSICS
Serious classics
OTHER M
Other music
5
To search a station, press jCursor k / n.
• To search downward from the current preset
station, press jCursor n.
• To search upward from the current preset station,
press jCursor k.
When a station is detected, the search stops. If the
station is not the desired one, Press the same key to
continue the search. To end the operation, press
sOPTION.
Using the enhanced other networks
(EON) data service
You can receive the EON (enhanced other networks) data
service of the Radio Data System station network. If you
are receiving Radio Data System broadcasting when an
affiliate station starts broadcasting a program you have
selected, this unit automatically switches station. To use
this feature, select one of the 4 Radio Data System
program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO or SPORT)
while receiving Radio Data System broadcasting. When
an affiliate station starts broadcasting a selected program,
this unit automatically tunes into that station, and returns
to the previous station when the selected program ends.
y
• To use the EON data service, you must first register the Radio Data
System stations and their affiliate stations (page 31).
• EON data service settings are reset when you turn the power off.
• You can also operate EON using the GUI screen.
1
Tune into the desired Radio Data System
broadcasting station.
• Frequency tuning (page 31)
• Preset tuning (page 32)
2
Press sOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for “TUNER” is displayed
(page 43).
3
Press jCursor k / n to select “EON” and
then press jENTER.
“EON:OFF” appears on the front panel display.
y
• “No Presets” or “No Presets in Memory” is displayed if no stations
are registered.
• “Not Available” is displayed if the affiliate station of the selected
preset station or the EON data service is not available.
4
Press jCursor l / h to select a program
type.
NEWS
OFF
5
AFFAIRS
SPORT
INFO
After selecting a program type, press
sOPTION again.
When an affiliate station starts broadcasting the
selected program, this unit automatically tunes in to
that station. When the program ends, it automatically
switches back to the previous station.
y
• The EON is turned off in the following cases:
– when the EON is activated once.
– when this unit is set to standby before EON is activated
– when another station is selected before EON is activated
• To cancel the EON, select “OFF” in step 4.
34 En
Using iPod™
Notes
• iPod touch, iPod (Click and Wheel including iPod classic), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
• Some features may not be available depending on the model of Yamaha iPod universal dock. The following sections describe the procedure when using
the YDS-11.
INTRODUCTION
Once you have stationed your iPod in a Yamaha iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-11, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit (page 18), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied
remote control or the menu displayed on the GUI screen. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this
unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as MP3 format) stored on your iPod (page 29).
y
Controlling iPod in menu browse mode
Controlling iPod™
Key
ENTER
You can browse song or video files stored on your iPod
using the GUI screen. You cannot directly control your
iPod in this mode.
y
• “_” (underscore) is displayed for characters that this unit cannot display.
1
Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
dDOCK) to select “iPod” (DOCK) as the
input source.
2
Press uDISPLAY on the remote control.
Function
Subsequent menu
n
Menu down
l
Previous menu
h
Subsequent menu
p
Play (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
s
Stop
e
Pause (Menu browse mode)
Play/Pause (Simple remote mode)
w
Search backward (Press and hold)
f
Search forward (Press and hold)
b
Skip backward
a
Skip forward
iPod
j
k
DISPLAY
Switch between Menu browse mode and
Simple remote mode
Input
DSP
3
DOCK
STRAIGHT
Press jCursor k / n to select “Music” or
“Videos” and then press jCursor h.
• Select “Music” to browse music files.
• Select “Videos” to browse video files.
Note
• The “Videos” menu does not appear unless the both your iPod and
Yamaha iPod universal dock support the video browsing feature.
4
Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a
menu item and then press jENTER to start
playback.
Controlling iPod in simple remote mode
You can perform basic iPod operations (play, stop, skip,
etc.) using the supplied remote control without displaying
the menu on the GUI screen. You can also directly control
your iPod in this mode.
APPENDIX
u
Music
Videos
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Menu up
ADVANCED
OPERATION
k
BASIC
OPERATION
You can control your iPod when you set it in the iPod
universal dock and switch the input source to DOCK. The
operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the
video display (menu browse mode) or without it (simple
remote mode).
When you connect your iPod to this unit, you can perform
the following operations with the remote control.
PREPARATION
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears on the front panel display.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and GUI screen, see “iPod” (page 70).
English
35 En
Using iPod™
■
Play information display
a
b
c
d
e
01:04
–02:27
Song Made-to-order
Artist Frankie Zipper
Album Road to India
Input
DSP
DOCK
Straight
a Shuffle and repeat icons
b (playback),
(pausing), (search forward) and
(search backward)
c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc)
d Elapsed time, progress bar, remaining time
e Song title, artist name, album title
y
• You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by
pressing EINFO (or fINFO).
• Album arts are available only when the file contains image data.
■ Shuffle/repeat playback
When controlling iPod in simple remote mode, operate the
iPod directly to set the shuffle and repeat playback.
1
Press uDISPLAY to switch to menu browse
mode while “DOCK” is selected as the input
source.
2
Press sOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for “iPod” is displayed (page 43).
3
Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or
“Repeat”, press jENTER and then press
jCursor l / h to select the desired
playback style.
Shuffle:
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in
random order.
• Select “Songs” to play back songs in random order.
• Select “Albums” to play back albums in random
order.
Repeat:
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back
repeatedly.
• Select “One” to repeat each song.
• Select “All” to repeat all songs.
4
To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.
36 En
Using Bluetooth™ components
Notes
• This unit supports A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) of the Bluetooth profile.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and GUI screen, see “Bluetooth™” (page 71).
y
• Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver YBA-10 can be paired with up to eight Bluetooth components. If ninth pairing data is registered, the pairing
data for the component least recently used is cleared.
Make sure the Bluetooth component
recognizes the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver.
If the Bluetooth component detects the Bluetooth
wireless audio receiver, “YBA-10 YAMAHA”
(example) appears in the Bluetooth device list.
6
Select the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
in the Bluetooth device list, and enter a pass
key “0000” into the Bluetooth component.
When pairing is complete, “Completed” appears on
the front panel display.
y
• If the pairing data has been cleared from the Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver or your Bluetooth component, you need to perform pairing
again.
• For details on operations on your Bluetooth component, refer to the
operating instruction of it.
To ensure security, a time limit of 8 minutes is set for
the pairing operation. You are recommended to read
and fully understand all the instructions before starting.
1
Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
dDOCK) to select “BLUETOOTH” (DOCK)
as the input source.
Turn on the Bluetooth component you want
to pair with and set it to pairing mode.
3
Press sOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for “BLUETOOTH” is displayed
(page 43).
1
Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
dDOCK) to select “BLUETOOTH” (DOCK)
as the input source.
2
Press sOPTION on the remote control.
3
Press jCursor n to select “Connect” and
then press jENTER.
The Bluetooth connection is established between the
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth
component connected last time.
Option Menu
Volume Trim
Connect
Pairing
4
Press jCursor n to select “Pairing” and
then press jENTER.
“Searching” appears and the pairing operation starts.
y
• To cancel pairing, press jRETURN.
• You can also start pairing operation by holding down
GMEMORY on the front panel.
4
Start playback of the Bluetooth component.
5
To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.
37 En
English
• If the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver cannot find the Bluetooth
component connected last time, “Not found” appears on the front
panel display.
• To disconnect the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver from the
Bluetooth component currently connected, select “Disconnect” and
then press jENTER or perform a disconnect operation on the
Bluetooth component.
• To make a connection between the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
and another Bluetooth component (already paired), perform a
connect operation on the Bluetooth component while no Bluetooth
connection is established on the Bluetooth wireless audio receiver.
APPENDIX
y
BLUETOOTH
DSP 7ch Enhancer
Input
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
2
Playback of the Bluetooth™
component
ADVANCED
OPERATION
5
BASIC
OPERATION
Pairing the Bluetooth™ wireless audio
receiver and your Bluetooth
component
PREPARATION
About “Pairing”
Pairing (registration of the Bluetooth devices) must be performed when making Bluetooth connections between the
Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and your Bluetooth components for the first time. Once pairing is complete,
you can select one of the Bluetooth components to connect to the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver for playback.
INTRODUCTION
You can connect a Yamaha Bluetooth wireless audio receiver (such as YBA-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal of
this unit and enjoy the music contents stored in your Bluetooth component (such as a portable music player) without
wiring between this unit and the Bluetooth component.
Using USB storage devices
You can enjoy playback of WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA, MPEG-4 AAC and FLAC files stored on your USB
memory device or USB portable player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. This unit supports USB
mass storage class devices (FAT 16 or FAT 32 format, except USB HDDs).
Notes
• You can play back only the files stored in the first partition.
• Some files may not be playable depending on models and types of USB storage devices.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel display and GUI screen, see “USB and network” (page 72).
Playback of the USB storage device
■
Play information display
a
1
Connect your USB storage device to the
NUSB port on the front panel (page 19).
b
c
2
Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
dUSB/NET and then wUSB) to select
“USB” as the input source.
d
e
00:30
Song Made-to-order
Artist Frankie Zipper
Album Road to India
Input
DSP
USB
7ch Enhancer
Option Menu
USB
Road to India
Symphony 01
Symphony 02
Symphony 03
Take–Hero
Input
DSP
USB
7ch Enhancer
Option Menu
If you have connected the USB storage device to this
unit before, playback of the music file played at the
last time automatically starts.
3
4
Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a
music file to play back.
• To select a file or folder, press jCursor k / n.
• To confirm the selection, press jCursor h or
jENTER.
• To return to the previous menu, press jCursor
l.
Press jENTER to start playback.
You can also perform the following operations with
the remote control.
Key
a Shuffle and repeat icons
b
(playback)
c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc)
d Elapsed time
e Song title, artist name, album title
y
• You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by
pressing EINFO (or fINFO) (page 26).
• Album arts are available only when the file contains image data.
Shuffle/repeat playback
y
• These settings are also reflected in playback of PC contents.
1
Press sOPTION on the remote control
while “USB” is selected as the input source.
The Option menu for “USB” is displayed (page 43).
2
Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or
“Repeat”, press jENTER and then press
jCursor l / h to select the desired
playback style.
Function
p
Play
s
Stop
Shuffle:
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in
random order.
• Select “On” to play back music files in random
order.
k
a
Skip forward during playback
b
Skip backward during playback
Repeat:
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back
repeatedly.
• Select “One” to repeat each music file.
• Select “All” to repeat all music files in the folder.
3
38 En
To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.
Using PC servers
Note
• If you do not use a DHCP server, configure the network parameters (IP address, etc) of this unit manually (page 53)
Windows Media Player 11 setup
2
Install Windows Media Player 11 on your PC.
You can download the installer of Windows Media
Player 11 from the Microsoft website, or use the
upgrade function of the installed Microsoft Windows
Media Player.
Key
Function
p
Play
s
Stop
k
■
a
Skip forward during playback
b
Skip backward during playback
Play information display
a
Notes
b
c
d
e
00:13
Song Made-to-order
Artist Frankie Zipper
Album Road to India
Input
Playback of PC music contents
y
• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel
display and GUI screen, see “USB and network” (page 72).
PC
PC_SERVER01
PC_SERVER02
Input
DSP
Option Menu
a Shuffle and repeat icons
b
(playback)
c Album art (image of CD jacket, etc)
d Elapsed time
e Song title, artist name, album title
y
• You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by
pressing EINFO (or fINFO) (page 26).
• Album arts are available only when the file contains image data.
Option Menu
Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select a PC
server and music file to play back.
• To select a PC server, folder or file, press
jCursor k / n.
• To confirm the selection, press jCursor h or
jENTER.
• To return to the previous menu, press jCursor
l.
APPENDIX
2
PC
7ch Enhancer
PC
7ch Enhancer
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
dUSB/NET and then wPC) to select “PC”
as the input source.
DSP
ADVANCED
OPERATION
• If the operating system (OS) of your PC is Windows Vista, Windows
Media Player 11 is pre-installed (except some products).
• Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus software,
firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this unit to your PC. In
such cases, configure the security software appropriately.
• You can connect this unit to up to 16 PC servers, and each server must be
connected to the same subnet as this unit.
1
BASIC
OPERATION
Turn on your PC then allow media sharing.
Activate Windows Media Player 11 first, enable the
media sharing and then select this unit as a device to
which the media is shared.
Press jENTER to start playback.
You can also perform the following operations with
the remote control.
PREPARATION
1
3
INTRODUCTION
You can enjoy playback of audio files stored on PCs connected to this unit via your network. To play back audio files on
your PC, you need to install Windows Media Player 11 on the PC and configure the media sharing setting of Windows
Media Player 11.
English
y
• To update the PC server list displayed in the GUI screen, press
sOPTION, press jCursor k / n to select “Refresh” and then
press jENTER. To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.
39 En
Using PC servers
Shuffle/repeat playback
y
• These settings are also reflected in playback of USB contents.
1
Press sOPTION on the remote control
while “PC” is selected as the input source.
The Option menu for “PC” is displayed (page 43).
2
Press jCursor k / n to select “Shuffle” or
“Repeat”, press jENTER and then press
jCursor l / h to select the desired
playback style.
Shuffle:
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back in
random order.
• Select “On” to play back music files in random
order.
Repeat:
• Select “Off” if you do not want to play back
repeatedly.
• Select “One” to repeat each music file.
• Select “All” to repeat all music files in the folder.
3
To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.
40 En
Using the Internet Radio feature
You can listen to Internet Radio stations using the vTuner Internet Radio station database service particularly customized
for this unit, providing a database of over 2000 radio stations. Also, you can store your favorite stations with bookmarks.
■
PREPARATION
Listening to Internet Radio
Play information display
a
y
• For a complete list of status messages that appear on the front panel
display and GUI screen, see “USB and network” (page 72).
1
b
1.fm 80s Euro
BASIC
OPERATION
Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
dUSB/NET and then wNET RADIO) to
select “NET RADIO” as the input source.
NET RADIO
Bookmarks
Locations
Genres
New Stations
Popular Stations
Podcasts
Help
Input
DSP
Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select an
item to play back.
• To select an item, press jCursor k / n.
• To confirm the selection, press jCursor h or
jENTER.
• To return to the previous menu, press jCursor
l.
Press jENTER to start playback.
You can also perform the following operations with
the remote control.
Key
Function
p
Play
s
Stop
k
NET RADIO
7ch Enhancer
Option Menu
Bookmark
a
(playback)
b Station name
y
• You can switch the information displayed on the front panel display by
pressing EINFO (or fINFO) (page 26).
Storing your favorite Internet Radio
stations with bookmarks
1
Select the desired Internet Radio station.
2
Press eMEMORY.
The selected Internet Radio station is added to the
“Bookmarks” list in “NET RADIO”.
y
APPENDIX
• To remove stations from the “Bookmarks” list, select the station under
“Bookmarks” and then press eMEMORY.
• You can also register your favorite Internet Radio stations on this unit by
accessing the website with the web browser on your PC. To use this
feature, you need the vTuner ID of this unit (page 54) and your e-mail
address to create your personal account. For details, refer to the help
information on the website. URL: http://yradio.vtuner.com/
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
3
Option Menu
DSP
ADVANCED
OPERATION
2
NET RADIO
7ch Enhancer
Input
INTRODUCTION
Notes
• To use this feature, your network must be connected to the Internet.
• A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is strongly recommended
(i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem, etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP.
• If you do not use a DHCP server, configure the network parameters (IP address, etc) of this unit manually (page 53)
• Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access of this unit to Internet Radio stations. In such cases, configure the security settings
appropriately.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
• Some Internet Radio stations may not be played
English
41 En
Other functions
Selecting the HDMI OUT jack
2
Enable the HDMI control function on each
device.
For this unit, set “HDMI Control” to “On” (page 51).
For external devices, refer to the manual supplied
with each device.
3
Turn off the TV and then turn on it again.
Use this feature to select the HDMI OUT jack(s) to output
the input signals.
Press gHDMI OUT repeatedly to select the
active HDMI OUT jack(s).
HDMI OUT 1+2
HDMI OUT OFF
HDMI OUT 1
HDMI OUT 2
•
HDMI OUT1+2
Outputs the signals from both the HDMI
OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks
simultaneously.
HDMI OUT 1
Outputs the signals from the HDMI OUT 1
jack.
HDMI OUT 2
Outputs the signals from the HDMI OUT 2
jack.
HDMI OFF
Not to output any signals from the HDMI
OUT jacks. Select this setting when you do
not use the video monitor connected to one
of the HDMI OUT jacks.
(Steps 4 through 6 are required for making the TV
learn linked devices. If the connections or
devices are switched, you need to carry out
these steps again.)
4
Select this unit as the input source of the TV.
5
Turn on the HDMI control device (Blu-ray or
DVD player) connected to this unit.
6
Select the HDMI control device (Blu-ray or
DVD player) as the input source of this unit to
check the video input.
7
Check if the HDMI control function works
(turn on this unit or adjust the volume level
using the remote control of the TV).
y
• This unit automatically activates the HDMI OUT 1 jack when receiving
an HDMI control signal through the HDMI OUT 1 jack while the HDMI
OUT 1 jack is not selected.
Using the HDMI™ control function
You can operate the following functions of this unit with
the remote control of your TV when the TV (HDMI
control function supported) is connected to the HDMI
OUT 1 jack of this unit.
• Turning on this unit or to the standby (conjunction with
TV)
• Adjusting the volume
• Selecting a device to reproduce TV sounds (this unit or
TV)
y
• Even if your TV supports the HDMI control function, some functions
may not be available. For details, refer to the manual supplied with your
TV.
• If you connect this unit and Blu-ray player or DVD player (HDMI
control function supported) with HDMI, you can also control those
devices with the HDMI control function. For details, refer to the manual
supplied with each device.
• We suggest that you use products (TV, Blu-ray/DVD player, etc.) from
the same manufacturer.
• The HDMI control-compatible components include Panasonic VIERA
Link compatible TV, DVD player/recorder and Blu-ray Disc player.
(Steps 1 through 3 are required for the HDMI
control function setup.)
1
Turn on all devices connected to this unit
with HDMI.
42 En
Note
<Note>
• In case the HDMI control function does not work, check the
followings. Also, turning off (unplug) and turning on (plug) the TV
may be effective.
– The TV is connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack of this unit.
– “HDMI Control” is set to “On” on this unit.
– The HDMI control function is enables on the TV.
y
• This unit automatically selects the TV scene (page 24) when you
select this unit as the device to reproduce TV sounds using the
remote control of your TV. That is, if you connect an audio output
jack of your TV to the AV 1 (OPTICAL) jack of this unit, you can
enjoy TV sounds with the specified sound field program soon.
Using the sleep timer
The sleep timer is useful if you want to go to sleep while
this unit is playing or recording a source.
Press qSLEEP repeatedly to select the amount
of time.
The sleep timer setting changes as follows.
Sleep 120min.
Sleep Off
Sleep 90min.
Sleep 30min.
Sleep 60min.
If the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator on the front
panel display lights up.
To disable the sleep timer, select “Sleep Off”.
ADVANCED OPERATION
Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)
1
Press sOPTION on the remote control.
Option Menu
Volume Trim
Decoder Mode
Extended Surround
Signal Info
DSP
3
Menu items
Volume Trim, Connect/Disconnect,
Pairing
TUNER
Volume Trim, FM Mode, Auto
Preset, Clear Preset, PTY Seek, EON
Notes
*1
Only “Volume Trim” is available when no external device is connected
to the HDMI IN jack.
*2 “Shuffile” and “Repeat” are not available during the simple remote
mode.
Details of the menu items are as follows. The
configuration will be reflected to the input source
currently selected.
HDMI 1
Straight
BASIC
OPERATION
Input
Input source
BLUETOOTH (DOCK)
y
Press jCursor k / n to select the desired
menu item and then press jENTER.
• The default settings are marked with “*”.
Volume Trim
Input source:
All
Adjustable range: –6.0dB to 0.0dB* to +6.0dB
(in 0.5 dB steps)
5
To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.
To return to the previous menu, press jRETURN.
Reduces any change in volume when switching input
sources by correcting volume differences between input
sources.
Note
Decoder Mode
• In case jCursor k / n / l / h or other keys do not work after
closing the Option menu, press dInput selection key to
select the current input source again.
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4, V-AUX
Choices:
Auto*, DTS
The following menu items are provided for each input
source.
Input source
Menu items
AV5-6
PHONO
Volume Trim
AUDIO1/2
MULTI CH
Volume Trim, Video Out
iPod (DOCK)*2
Volume Trim, Shuffle, Repeat
NET RADIO (USB/NET)
Volume Trim, Signal Info
USB (USB/NET)
Volume Trim, Signal Info, Shuffle,
Repeat
PC (USB/NET)
Volume Trim, Signal Info, Shuffle,
Repeat, Refresh
Automatically selects audio input signals.
Selects DTS signals only. Other input signals
are not reproduced.
Extended Surround
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4, V-AUX
Choices:
Auto*, PLIIxMovie, PLIIxMusic, EX/ES, Off
Selects whether to reproduce multi-channel (or 2-channel)
input signals in 6.1- or 7.1-channel when surround back
speakers are used.
Auto
PLIIx
Movie
Automatically selects the most suitable
decoder if a flag for reproducing surround back
channel is present, and reproduces the signals
in 6.1- or 7.1-channel.
Always reproduces signals in 7.1-channel
using the PLIIxMovie decoder whether or not
surround back channel signals are contained.
You can select this parameter when two
surround back speakers are connected.
43 En
English
Volume Trim, Decoder Mode,
Extended Surround, Signal Info
Auto
DTS
APPENDIX
HDMI1-4
AV1-4
V-AUX*1
Selects DTS digital audio signals for reproduction.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Press jCursor k / n / l / h to select the
desired setting and then press jENTER
ADVANCED
OPERATION
4
Option menu items
PREPARATION
2
Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
dInput selection key) to select the
desired input source.
If you press dUSB/NET on the remote control,
press wSub-input selection key to select a
sub-input source.
INTRODUCTION
The Option menu allows users to configure various settings for each input source and reflect corresponding settings
automatically when an input source is switched. Also, you can view the signal information for certain input sources.
The procedure for setting the Option menu items is described below.
Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)
PLIIx
Music
EX/ES
Off
Always reproduces signals in 6.1- or 7.1channel using the PLIIxMusic decoder whether
or not surround back channel signals are
contained. You can select this parameter when
one or two surround back speakers are
connected.
Automatically selects the most suitable
decoder for input signals whether or not the
flag for reproducing surround back channel is
present, and always reproduces signals in 6.1channel.
Always reproduces original signals whether or
not the flag for reproducing surround back
channel is present.
Device Over
The number of HDMI components
connected is over the limit.
Out of Res.
The connected monitor is not compatible
with the video input signal.
FM Mode
Input source: TUNER
Choices:
Stereo*, Mono
Sets FM broadcasting receiving mode.
Stereo
Mono
Receives in stereo mode by priority.
Receives in monaural mode. You can get a
better reception in monaural mode.
Signal Info
Auto Preset
Input source: HDMI1-4, AV1-4, V-AUX, USB (USB/NET), NET
RADIO (USB/NET), PC (USB/NET)
Input source: TUNER
Displays information on audio and video signals on the
GUI screen and front panel display. You can change items
to be displayed using jCursor k / n.
Automatically detects FM radio stations and registers
them as preset stations (page 31).
Clear Preset
Input source: TUNER
• Audio information
Clears preset station (page 32).
•
Format
Format of digital audio signals.
Channel
The number of input signal channels
(front/surround/LFE).
For example, if input signal channels are
3 front channels, 2 surrounds and LFE,
“3/2/0.1” is displayed.
If a channel that cannot be expressed as
the above, a total number of channels
such as “5.1ch” may be displayed.
Searches a station that is broadcasting a program under the
desired category from the preset stations while using the
Radio Data System (page 33).
Sampling
Frequency
The sampling frequency per second in
analog-to-digital conversion.
Shuffle
Bitrate
The bit rate of input signal per second.
PTY Seek
Input source: TUNER
EON
Input source: TUNER
Enables you to receive the EON (enhanced other network)
data service of the Radio Data System (page 34).
Input source: iPod (DOCK), USB (USB/NET), PC (USB/NET)
Choices:
iPod (DOCK): Off*, Songs, Albums
USB (USB/NET), PC (USB/NET): Off*, On
Changes the shuffle playback style.
Notes
• “No Signal” is displayed when no signals are input and “---” is displayed
when signals that this unit cannot recognize are input.
• The bit rate may vary during playback.
y
• This setting is shared among the USB/NET sub-input sources (USB and
PC).
Repeat
• Video information
Input source: iPod (DOCK), USB (USB/NET), PC (USB/NET)
Choices:
Off*, One, All
•
Video In
Format and resolution of video input
signal.
Changes the repeat playback style.
Video Out
Format and resolution of video output
signal.
• This setting is shared among the USB/NET sub-input sources (USB and
PC).
Message
Error messages about HDMI signals and
HDMI components. See the following for
details of the error messages.
• HDMI error message
(appears only when an error has occurred)
•
HDCP Error
44 En
HDCP authentication failed.
y
Refresh
Input source: PC (USB/NET)
Updates the PC server list displayed in the GUI screen
(page 39).
Connect / Disconnect
Input source: BLUETOOTH (DOCK)
Connects to or disconnects from a Bluetooth component
(page 37).
Setting the option menu for each input source (Option menu)
Pairing
Input source: BLUETOOTH (DOCK)
INTRODUCTION
Performs pairing of this unit and a Bluetooth component
(page 37).
Video Out
Input source: AUDIO 1/2, MULTI CH
Choices:
AV1 to AV6, Off*
Specifies a video signal to be output during an audio
reproduction. For details, see “Selecting a video signal to
be output during an audio reproduction” on this page.
PREPARATION
Selecting a video signal to be output
during an audio reproduction
This function enables this unit to output video signals
when “AUDIO 1”, “AUDIO 2” or “MULTI CH” is
selected as the input source. Follow the procedure below
to select the video to be output during an audio
reproduction.
2
Press sOPTION on the remote control.
The Option menu for the selected input source is
displayed.
3
Press jCursor k / n to select “Video Out”
and then press jENTER.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press
dInput selection keys) to select “AUDIO
1”, “AUDIO 2” or “MULTI CH” as the input
source.
BASIC
OPERATION
1
4
Press jCursor l / h to select a video input
jack to be used during an audio
reproduction.
– AV1-2 (COMPONENT VIDEO)
– AV3-6 (VIDEO)
– Off (no video output)
5
To exit the Option menu, press sOPTION.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Video;;;;;;Off
APPENDIX
English
45 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
You can call the Setup menu using the remote control and change the settings of various menus.
For details, read “Basic operation of the Setup menu” first, and see the respective pages.
Menu/Submenu
Function
Page
Sets items for speakers.
48
Auto Setup (YPAO)
Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers.
48
Manual Setup
Speaker Setup
Manually adjusts output characteristics of speakers.
48
Speaker Configuration
Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of speaker and a size of the
connected speaker (sound reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening
environment.
48
Speaker Level
Separately adjusts volume of each speaker.
50
Speaker Distance
Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound based on distances between
speakers and the listening position.
50
Equalizer
Selects an equalizer that adjusts speaker output characteristics.
50
Test Tone
Generates test tones.
50
Sets various items for sound outputs.
51
Dynamic Range
Adjusts dynamic ranges of speakers and headphones.
51
Lipsync
Adjusts delay in output timing between video signals and audio signals.
51
HDMI OUT1
Fine adjusts the delay time of automatic lipsync applied when only the HDMI
OUT 1 jack is used or when both the HDMI OUT 1 and HDMI OUT 2 jacks are
used.
51
HDMI OUT2
Fine adjusts the delay time of automatic lipsync applied when only the HDMI
OUT 2 jack is used.
51
ANALOG MONITOR OUT
Adjusts the delay time applied when only the analog MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks are used.
51
Sound Setup
46 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
Menu/Submenu
Function
Page
Standby Through
Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or
HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack to the active HDMI OUT jack(s) when this unit is
on standby.
51
Audio Output
Selects this unit or a component connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack of this unit
for reproducing sound signals.
51
Resolution
Sets resolution of the HDMI output that is converted from analogy visual input
signals.
52
Aspect
Set an aspect ratio of images reproduced by HDMI signals converted from analog
video input signals.
52
Sets items for a video monitor or the front panel display.
52
Dimmer
Sets brightness of the front panel display.
52
Front Panel Display Scroll
Selects the way to display characters on the front panel display.
52
GUI Position
Adjusts top and bottom positions of the GUI screen displayed on the video
monitor.
52
Sets items for volumes.
52
Adaptive DRC
Adjusts the dynamic range (difference between the maximum volume and the
minimum volume) in conjunction with the volume level.
52
Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will not be accidentally
increased.
53
Initial Volume
Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on.
53
Input Rename
Changes input source names to be displayed on the GUI screen or the front panel
display.
53
Zone
Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level of Zone2/3.
53
Zone2 Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume level of Zone2.
53
Zone2 Initial Volume
Sets the volume level of Zone2 applied when this unit is turned on.
53
Zone3 Max Volume
Sets the maximum volume level of Zone3.
53
Zone3 Initial Volume
Sets the volume level of Zone3 applied when this unit is turned on.
53
Display
Volume
Sets items for network features.
53
IP Address
Sets the network parameters (IP address, etc) manually.
53
MAC Address Filter
Sets MAC address filter to restrict access to this unit via LAN.
53
Network Standby
Selects whether or not to accept the commands via network when this unit is on
standby.
54
Network
54
Sets parameters for the sound field programs.
54
Memory Guard
Protects some settings against accidental alteration.
57
Information
APPENDIX
Displays network information.
DSP Parameter
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
51
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Selects on or off of the HDMI control function when a component that supports
the HDMI control function is connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack of this unit.
BASIC
OPERATION
51
HDMI Control
PREPARATION
51
Sets various items for input sources.
HDMI
INTRODUCTION
Sets various items for HDMI and display.
Function Setup
English
47 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
Basic operation of the Setup menu
5
The Setup menu screen appears on both the GUI screen
and front panel display.
GUI screen
Setup Menu
Press jCursor k / n to select an item to edit
and then press jCursor l / h to change
the setting.
Some items in “Manual Setup” of “Speaker Setup”
take up a full screen. To display other items in
“Manual Setup”, press jCursor k / n.
Example (Speaker Configuration)
Speaker Setup
Sound Setup
Function Setup
DSP Parameter
Memory Guard
Speaker Configuration
Front Speaker
Small
Large
Front panel display
;SpeakerSetup
In this section, procedures of setting menus using the
video monitor are described.
1
Press iON SCREEN on the remote control.
The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.
2
Press jCursor n to select “Setup” and then
press jENTER.
The Setup menu appears on the video monitor.
3
Press jCursor k / n to select the desired
menu then press jENTER.
Items of the selected menu are displayed.
Example (Function Setup)
y
• To configure other items, repeat step 5.
6
To turn off the GUI screen, press iON
SCREEN.
Note
• In case jCursor k / n / l / h or other keys do not work after
closing the Setup menu, press dInput selection key to
select the current input source again.
Speaker Setup
You can set various items for speakers. Two kinds of
adjustments are available. One is “Auto Setup” (YPAO)
for automatic adjustment and another is “Manual Setup”
for manual adjustment.
y
• The default settings are marked with “*”.
Auto Setup
Function Setup
Automatically adjusts output characteristics of speakers to
obtain optimum balance for the output sound based on
positions and performances of the speakers and acoustic
characteristics or the room, which are automatically
measured. For details on operations, see page 21.
HDMI
Display
Volume
Input Rename
Zone
Network
y
• To return to the previous menu, press jRETURN.
4
If necessary, press jCursor k / n to select
the desired submenu then press jENTER.
Example (Volume)
Volume
Adaptive DRC
Max Volume
Initial Volume
Off
+16.5dB
Off
Manual Setup
Adjusts output characteristics of speakers based on
manually set parameters.
After “Auto Setup” (YPAO) is performed, you can check
automatically adjusted parameters in the “Manual Setup”
menu. Fine adjust the parameters for your preference if
necessary.
■ Speaker Configuration
Sets speaker configurations, such as connection status of
speaker and a size of the connected speaker (sound
reproduction capacity), suitable for the listening
environment.
y
• The speaker configuration includes items for defining a speaker size:
“Large” or “Small”. “Large” and “Small” refer to speakers with woofer
diameters 16 cm or larger and smaller than 16 cm, respectively.
48 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
Extra Speaker Assignment
Choices:
Large
Zone2*, Zone2 + Zone3, Presence, None
Zone2
Zone2 +
Zone3
Presence
None
Center Speaker
Choices:
None
Small
Notes
• When setting “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Zone2” or “Presence”, surround
back channel signals for main unit are separately output from other channels.
• When setting “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Zone2 + Zone3”, surround and
surround back channel signals for main unit are separately output from other
channels.
Large
LFE / Bass Out
Subwoofer, Front, Both*
Selects speaker(s) for outputting low-frequency
components of the LFE (low-frequency effect sound)
channel or other channels. The output status is as follows.
Surround Speaker
Choices:
None
Subwoofer
Other
speakers
Subwoofer
Output
Not output
Not output
Front
Not output
Output
Not output
Both
Output
Not output
Not output
Small
Low-frequency components of other channel signals
Large
Subwoofer
Front
speakers
Other
speakers
Subwoofer
[1]
[2]
[2]
Front
Not output
[3]
[2]
Both
[3]
[4]
[2]
y
• When “None” is selected, the sound field programs automatically enter
the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.
Surround Back Speaker
Choices:
None, Large x 1, Small x 1, Large x 2, Small x 2*
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Parameter
Select this when no surround speakers are
connected. Surround channel signals are
spread to front left and right speakers.
“Surround Back Speaker” automatically
switches to “None” when this is selected.
Select this when small surround speakers are
connected. Low-frequency components of
surround channels are output from a
subwoofer. If a subwoofer is not connected
they are output from front speakers.
Select this when large surround speakers are
connected.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Front
speakers
None, Small*, Large
Sets sizes of left and right surround speakers.
LFE channel signals
Parameter
Select this when no center speaker is
connected. Center channel signals are spread
to front left and right speakers.
Select this when a small center speaker is
connected. Low-frequency components of
center channel are output from a subwoofer.
If a subwoofer is not connected they are
output from front speakers.
Select this when a large center speaker is
connected.
BASIC
OPERATION
Choices:
None, Small*, Large
Sets the size of center speaker.
PREPARATION
Assigns the SP1 terminals for Zone2 speakers
and disables the SP2 terminals.
Assigns the SP1 terminals for Zone2 speakers
and SP2 terminals for Zone3 speakers.
Assigns the SP1 terminals for presence
speakers and disables the SP2 terminals.
Disables the EXTRA SP (SP1/SP2)
terminals.
Note
• If “LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Front”, “Front Speaker” automatically
switches to “Large” even when it is set to “Small”.
INTRODUCTION
Selects the application for the EXTRA SP (SP1/SP2)
terminals.
Select this when large speakers are
connected.
Sets sizes of left and right surround back speakers.
[1]
[2]
[4]
Front Speaker
Choices:
None
Large x 1
Small x 1
Small, Large*
Large x 2
Small
Small x 2
Select this when small speakers are
connected. Low-frequency components of the
front left and right channels are output from a
subwoofer.
49 En
English
Sets the sizes of front left and right speakers.
Select this when no surround back speaker
are connected. Surround back channel signals
are output from the surround L/R speakers
and subwoofer. If the subwoofer is disabled,
they are output from the surround L/R
speakers and front speakers.
Select this when one large surround back
speaker is connected.
Select this when one small surround back
speaker is connected.
Select this when two large surround back
speakers are connected.
Select this when two small surround back
speakers are connected.
APPENDIX
[3]
Outputs low-frequency components of the channel of speaker,
the size of which is set to “Small”.
Outputs low-frequency components when the sizes of speakers
are set to “Large”.
Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right
channels and the channel of speaker, the size of which is set to
“Small”.
Outputs low-frequency components of the front left and right
channels.
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
y
• When “Surround Back Speaker” is set to “None”, “PLIIx Movie”,
“PLIIx Music” and “PLIIx Game” of the surround decode mode
(page 29) are not available.
Bass Crossover Frequency
Choices:
40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz*, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz,
160Hz, 200Hz
Sets the lower limit of the low-frequency component
output from a speaker with a size set to “Small” (Small x
1, Small x 2) Sound with a frequency below that limit is
output from a subwoofer or front speakers.
If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover
frequency control, set the volume to half or the crossover
frequency at the maximum.
Subwoofer Phase
Choices:
Normal*, Reverse
FR.L / FR.R / CNTR / SUR.L / SUR.R / SBL / SBR /
SWFR / PR.L / PR.R
Adjustable range: 0.30m to 24.00m (1.0ft to 80.0ft)
Defaults:
3.00m (10.0ft) (FR.L, FR.R, SWFR, PR.L,
PR.R)
2.60m (8.5ft) (CNTR)
2.40m (8.0ft) (SUR.L, SUR.R, SBL, SBR)
y
• Available items differ depending on the “Speaker Configuration” settings
(page 48).
• When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears
instead of “SBL” and “SBR”.
■ Equalizer
Adjusts sound quality and tone using a parametric graphic
equalizer.
EQ Type Select
Sets the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are
lacking or unclear.
Choices:
Normal
Auto PEQ
Reverse
■
Select this not to change the phase of your
subwoofer.
Select this to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
Speaker Level
Adjustable range: –10.0dB to +10.0dB (0.5dB step)
Defaults:
0dB (FR.L, FR.R, SWFR, PR.L, PR.R)
–1.0dB (CNTR, SUR.L, SUR.R, SBL, SBR)
Separately adjusts volume of each speaker so that the
sounds form speakers are at the same volume at the
listening position. Items to be displayed vary depending
on the number of speakers connected.
y
• When only one surround back speaker is connected, “SB” appears
instead of “SBL” and “SBR”.
• You can adjust the volume listening to test tones when you set “Test
Tone” to “On” (on this page).
• If your subwoofer has a volume control or a crossover frequency control,
set the volume to half or the crossover frequency at the maximum.
Auto PEQ, GEQ*, Off
Selects an equalizer type.
GEQ
Off
Uses a parametric equalizer selected in
“Auto Setup”. Characteristics of the
currently used parametric equalizer are
displayed below “Auto PEQ”.
Uses a graphic equalizer. Press jENTER
to adjust the characteristics of the graphic
equalizer.
Not use a graphic equalizer.
GEQ
Channels
Front Left, Front Right, Center, Surround Left,
Surround Right, Surround Back Left, Surround
Back Right
Choices:
63Hz, 160Hz, 400Hz, 1kHz, 2.5kHz, 6.3kHz,
16kHz
Adjustable range: –6.0dB to 0dB* to +6.0dB (0.5dB step)
■ Speaker Distance
Adjusts timing at which each speaker outputs sound so
that sounds from speakers reach the listening position at
the same time. Set unit (Unit) first and set the distance of
each speaker.
Adjusts sound quality of each speaker using a graphic
equalizer. The graphic equalizer of this unit can adjust
signal levels in 7 frequency ranges.
To adjust the signal level within each range, press
jCursor l / h to select the desired speaker while
“Channel” is selected, press jCursor k / n to select the
desired frequency band and then press jCursor l / h
to adjust the signal level.
Unit
■
Choices:
meters (m)
feet (ft)
meters (m)*, feet (ft)
Displays the speaker distance in meters.
Displays the speaker distance in feet.
Off*, On
Switches between on and off of an oscillator that generates
test tones. When “On” is selected, you can adjust the
settings of “Manual Setup” while listening to a test tone.
Off
On
50 En
Test Tone
Choices:
Not generate test tones.
Generates test tones.
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
Sound Setup
You can set various items for sound outputs.
Dynamic Range
Choices:
Min/Auto, STD, Max*
Selects the dynamic range adjustment method for
reproducing bitstream signals.
Min/Auto
Max
HDMI
You can set items for HDMI.
■
HDMI Control
Choices:
On, Off*
Selects on or off of the HDMI control function when a
component that supports the HDMI control function is
connected to the HDMI OUT 1 jack of this unit. When this
parameter is set to “On”, this unit output signals input
from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX)
jack to the video monitor even when this unit is on
standby.
On
Off
Enables the HDMI control function.
Disables the HDMI control function.
• The BHDMI THROUGH indicator lights up in the following cases
while this unit is on standby.
– when the HDMI control function is on
– when the HDMI signal standby-through function is currently working
• When “HDMI Control” is set to “On”, this unit consumes 1 to 3 watts of
power depending on a condition of an HDMI signal passing through this
unit.
HDMI OUT1
Selects on or off of output of HDMI signals input from the
HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack to the
active HDMI OUT jack(s) when this unit is on standby.
When this parameter is set to “On”, this unit output signals
input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO
AUX) jack to the video monitor(s) even when this unit is
on standby.
On
Outputs the HDMI signals to the active
HDMI OUT jack(s)
Not output the HDMI signals to the HDMI
OUT 1/2 jacks.
HDMI OUT2
Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step)
Displays the delay time adjusted by automatic lipsync for
HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT 2 jack. To fine
adjust the delay time, set an offset time in the “Offset”
field.
ANALOG MONITOR OUT
Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step)
Off
y
• This parameter is not available when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
• To enables HDMI signal standby-through output, any one of the input
sources connected to the HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX)
jack must be selected before switching to standby.
• When “Standby Through” is set to “On”, the BHDMI THROUGH
indicator lights up. In this state, the amount of power consumption in the
standby mode increases.
■
Audio Output
Choices:
Amplifier*, TV, Amplifier + TV
Selects this unit or a component connected to the HDMI
OUT 1 jack of this unit for reproducing sound signals
input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO
AUX) jack.
Amplifier
English
Outputs HDMI sound signals form the
speakers connected to this unit.
APPENDIX
Adjusts the delay time applied when only the analog
MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO)
jacks are used.
On, Off*
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Displays the delay time adjusted by automatic lipsync for
HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT 1 jack. To fine
adjust the delay time, set an offset time in the “Offset”
field. This offset time is also applied to the signals output
from the HDMI OUT 2 jack when both the HDMI OUT 1
and HDMI OUT 2 jacks are active.
Standby Through
Choices:
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Adjustable range: 0* to 240ms (1 ms step)
■
BASIC
OPERATION
y
■ Lipsync
Adjusts delay between video output and audio output.
This unit automatically adjusts the delay (automatic
lipsync) when a TV that supports the automatic lipsync is
connected to the HDMI OUT 1 or HDMI OUT 2 jack of
this unit and HDMI signals are output only from the
corresponding HDMI OUT jack.
PREPARATION
STD
(Min) Sets the dynamic range suitable for
low volume or a quiet environment, such as
at night, for bitstream signals except for
Dolby TrueHD signals.
(Auto) Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby
TrueHD signals based on input signal
information.
Sets the standard dynamic range
recommended for regular home use.
Outputs sound without adjusting the
dynamic range of the input signals.
You can set various items for HDMI and display.
INTRODUCTION
■
Function Setup
51 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
TV
Outputs HDMI sound signals from the
speakers of a TV connected to the HDMI
OUT 1/2 jacks of this unit. Sound output
from the speakers connected to this unit is
muted.
Amplifier + Outputs HDMI sound signals from the
TV
speakers connected to this unit and the
speakers of a TV connected HDMI OUT 1/2
jacks of this unit.
Note
Dimmer
Sets brightness of the front panel display. As the value is
lowered, the brightness of the front panel display is
darkened.
Note
• The brightness of display does not become bright in Pure Direct mode
even if the value is increased.
■
Front Panel Display Scroll
Choices:
• Signal formats of audio and visual signals output from this unit to the TV
vary depending on specifications of the monitor.
y
• This parameter is not available when “HDMI Control” is set to “On”.
■
■
Adjustable range: –4 to 0*
Continuous*, Once
Selects the way to scroll the screen when a total number of
characters exceed a display area of the front panel display.
Continuous
Repeatedly displays all characters by
scrolling.
Displays all characters by scrolling once,
halts scrolling and then displays first 14
characters.
Resolution
Choices:
Through*, 480p(576p), 720p, 1080i, 1080p
Upscales the resolution of HDMI output that is converted
from analog video input signals and output from the
HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks.
Once
■
GUI Position
Notes
Adjustable range: –5 to 0* to +5 (vertical/horizontal direction)
• Resolution of the HDMI output converted from 720p or 1080i analog
video signals cannot be upscaled.
• When a video monitor is connected to one of the HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks
and the corresponding HDMI OUT jack is selected (page 42), this unit
automatically detects a resolution that the monitor supports. An asterisk
(*) appears on the left of detected resolution.
• When a video monitor is connected to both of the HDMI OUT 1/2 jacks
and “HDMI OUT 1+2” is selected (page 42), this unit automatically
selects a resolution depending on the lower-resolution monitor.
• If this unit cannot detect the resolution that the monitor supports, set
“MON.CHK” in the advanced setup menu to “SKIP” (page 63) and try
again.
Adjusts the position of the GUI screen displayed on the
video monitor. To move the screen up (or to the right), set
this value larger. To move the screen down (or to the left),
set this value smaller.
■
Choices:
Aspect
Choices:
Through*, 16:9, Smart Zoom
Sets a horizontal to vertical ratio (aspect ratio) of images
reproduced by HDMI signals output from the HDMI OUT
1/2 jacks when the HDMI signals are converted from
analog video input signals by a video conversion function.
Volume
You can set items for volumes.
■
Adaptive DRC
Auto, Off*
Adjust the dynamic range in conjunction with the volume
level. This feature is useful when you are listening at
lower volumes or at night. When this function is enabled,
the dynamic range is adjusted as follows.
When the volume level is low: narrow the dynamic range
When the volume level is high: widen the dynamic range
Auto
Off
Output level
Outputs the video signals without changing
the aspect ratio.
16:9
Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3
images on a 16:9 TV with black bands on
the right and left sides of the TV screen.
Smart Zoom Outputs the video signals that displays 4:3
images on a 16:9 TV by stretching right and
left of images to fit on the TV screen.
Output level
Through
Auto
Input level
Volume : low
Off
Input level
Volume : high
Notes
• You cannot change the aspect ratio of the screen when “Resolution” is set
to “Through”.
• This setting is not effective for inputs with the aspect ratio other than 4:3.
• You cannot obtain an effect of the aspect ratio when visual signals are
input from the HDMI 1-4 jacks or HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack or
when 720p, 1080i or 1080p signals are input.
Display
You can set items for a video monitor and the front panel
display.
52 En
Auto
Off
Adjusts the dynamic range automatically.
Not adjust the dynamic range automatically.
y
• This setting is also effective for headphones.
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
■
■
Max Volume
Zone2/3 Initial Volume
Adjustable range: Off*, Mute, –80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step)
Sets the maximum volume level so that the volume will
not be accidentally increased. For example, you can adjust
the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB (or Mute) when
you set this parameter to “–5.0dB”. The volume increases
to the maximum level when this parameter is set to +16.5
dB (default).
Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone2/3 when
the power of Zone2/3 unit is turned on. When this
parameter is set to “Off”, the volume level used at the time
when the Zone2/3 unit was set to standby is applied.
■
Initial Volume
Adjustable range: Off*, Mute, –80.0dB to +16.5dB (0.5 dB step)
PREPARATION
Sets the volume at the time this unit is turned on. When
this parameter is set to “Off”, the volume level used when
this unit was set to standby is applied.
Note
• The “Zone2 Max Volume” or “Zone3 Max Volume” setting takes priority
over the “Zone2 Initial Volume” or “Zone3 Initial Volume” setting. For
example, if you set “Zone2 Max Volume” to “–30.0dB” and “Zone2
Initial Volume” to “0.0dB”, the volume is automatically set to “–30.0dB”
at the next time the Zone2 unit is turned on.
Network
You can set items for network features.
Note
• When you set “Max Volume” and “Initial Volume” the setting of “Max
Volume” becomes effective. For example, when you set “Max Volume”
to “–30.0dB” and “Init. Volume” to “0.0dB”, the volume is
automatically set to “–30.0dB” at the next time this unit is turned on.
■ IP Address
Sets the network parameters (IP address, etc).
DHCP
Choices:
Changes input source names to be displayed on the front
panel display.
On
Off
Select this setting when this unit can obtain
the network parameters from the DHCP
server of the connected network.
Select this setting when you set the network
parameters manually.
IP Address
Use this parameter to specify the IP address assigned to
this unit. This value must not be the same as the one used
for other devices in the target network.
jCursor l / h
jCursor k / n
jENTER
Subnet Mask
Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value
assigned to this unit.
Selects a character to edit.
Selects a character to enter.
Enters a selected character.
The following characters are available for input.
A to Z, 0 to 9, a to z, symbols (#, *, –, +, etc.) and space
Zone
Sets the maximum volume level and initial volume level
of Zone2/3.
y
■
Zone2/3 Max Volume
Adjustable range: –30.0dB to +15.0dB, +16.5dB* (5.0 dB step)
y
• If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in “DNS
Server (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses, enter one of them in
“DNS Server (P)” and another in “DNS Server (S)”.
■ MAC Address Filter
Sets MAC address filter to restrict access to this unit via
LAN.
MAC Address Filter
Choices:
Off*, On
Select whether or not to use the MAC address filter
function.
Off
Disables the MAC address filter function.
53 En
English
Sets the maximum volume level of Zone2/3, so that the
volume will not be accidentally increased. For example,
you can adjust the volume between –80.0 dB and –5.0 dB
when you set this parameter to “–5.0dB”.
DNS Server (P) / DNS Server (S)
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary
and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers.
APPENDIX
• The menu items for Zone2 are available only when “Extra Speaker
Assignment” is set to “Zone2” or “Zone2 + Zone3” (page 49).
• The menu items for Zone3 are available only when “Extra Speaker
Assignment” is set to “Zone2 + Zone3” (page 49).
Default Gateway
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default
gateway.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Entering an original name
Press jCursor k / n to select the input source name to
edit and then press jENTER. Enter up to 9 characters
by selecting one character at a time with the following key
operations.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Selecting a name to be displayed from templates
Press jCursor k / n to select the input source name to
edit and then press jCursor l / h to select a new
name from the templates (Blu-ray, DVD, SetTopBox,
etc.).
On*, Off
Select whether or not this unit obtain the network
parameters (IP address, subnet mask, default gateway,
primary DNS server and secondary DNS server) from the
DHCP server of the connected network.
BASIC
OPERATION
Input Rename
INTRODUCTION
Adjustable range: –30.0dB to +15.0dB, +16.5dB* (5.0 dB step)
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
On
Permit access to this unit only from network
devices with the specified MAC addresses.
DSP Parameter
MAC Address 1-10
Specify MAC addresses of network devices that are
permitted to access to this unit when “MAC Address
Filter” is set to “On”.
Although the field sound programs would satisfy you as
they are with the default parameters, you can arrange
sound effect or decoders suitable for acoustical conditions
of sources or rooms by setting the parameters.
■
1
Network Standby
Choices:
Off*, On
Selects whether or not to accept the commands via
network when this unit is on standby.
Off
On
Press jCursor k / n to select “DSP
Parameter” and then press jENTER.
Sound field program
Not accept the commands via network.
Accept the commands via network.
DSP Parameter
Program Name
Decode Type
DSP Level
P. Initial Delay
P. Room Size
Sur. Initial Delay
Sur. Room Size
y
• When “Network Standby” is set to “On”, the amount of power
consumption in the standby mode increases.
■ Information
Displays the network parameters (IP address, etc.) or
vTuner ID assigned to this unit.
Sound field parameters
Sci-Fi
PLIIx Movie
0dB
16ms
1.0
2ms
1.0
Set values
2
Press jCursor k / n to select “Program
Name” and then press jCursor l / h to
select a sound field program to edit.
3
Press jCursor k / n to select a parameter to
edit and then press jCursor l / h to
change the setting.
y
• Repeat steps 2 and 3 to change other sound field program
parameters.
To initialize the parameters of the selected sound field
program, press jCursor n repeatedly to select
“Initialize” and then press jCursor h. Then, press
jCursor h again to execute the initialization or
jCursor l to cancel it.
CINEMA DSP basic parameters
DSP Level
Adjustable range: –6dB to 0dB* to +3dB
Fine adjusts an effect level (level of the sound field effect
to be added). You can adjust the level of the sound field
effect while checking sound levels. Adjust “DSP Level” as
follows.
• The effect sound is too soft.
• There are no differences between effects of the sound
field programs.
→Increase the effect level.
• The sound is dull.
• The sound field effect is added too much.
→Reduce the effect level.
54 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
Dialogue Lift
Choices:
0* to 5
■
Parameters for adjusting early-reflected
sound
Initial Delay / P. Initial Delay / Sur. Initial Delay /
Sur. Back Initial Delay
Original source sound
Level
When the value is set to zero, the position is at the lowest.
The position gets higher as you increase the value.
Notes
Time
Delay
Time
ADVANCED
OPERATION
• This setting is available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment” is set to
“Presence” (page 49).
• You cannot move the dialogue position down from the initial dialogue
position.
Early-reflected
sound
Delay
Sound source
3D DSP
Choices:
On*, Off
When CINEMA DSP 3D is enabled, sets whether to use
sound field programs in 3D mode.
Reflecting
surface
Small = 1ms
Large = 99ms
y
• We recommended that you adjust the size of corresponding sound field
when you adjust the delay time.
■
Parameters for specifying room size
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Note
• This setting is available only when “Extra Speaker Assignment” is set to
“Presence” (page 49).
BASIC
OPERATION
Move up to the ideal
dialogue position
Adjusts attenuation characteristics of early-reflected
sound. You can create a lively sound field (with a high
reverberant sound level) as you increase the value, and a
dead sound field (with a low reverberant sound level) as
you decrease the value. Creating either a lively sound field
or a dead sound field in an actual music hall is determined
by the acoustic absorption characteristics of reflection
surfaces. A dead sound field is created when the
attenuation time is short while a lively sound field is
created when the attenuation time is long.
PREPARATION
If the dialogues are heard at the lower position of the video
monitor screen, increase the value of “Dialogue Lift”.
Adjustable range: 1 to 99ms (Initial Delay / P. Initial Delay), 1 to
49ms (Sur. Initial Delay / Sur. Back Initial
Delay)
Level
The ideal dialogue
position
INTRODUCTION
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the
dialogues in movies. The ideal position of the dialogues is
at the center of the video monitor screen.
Sound field parameters for advanced
configurations
Room Size / P. Room Size / Sur. Room Size / Sur.
Back Room Size
Adjustable range: 0.1 to 2.0
APPENDIX
Produces different senses of sound expansion according to
room sizes specified. In a large size room such as a music
hall, the duration from when reflected sound is heard until
when the next reflected sound is heard is long. Thus,
different senses of sound expansion can be created by
changing the duration. 1.0 is the original room size. When
this parameter is set to 2.0, each side of the room is
defined as twice larger than the original room size.
English
55 En
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
■
Source sound
Level
Level
Early reflections
Time
Time
Sound source
Parameters for adjusting reverberant sound
Reverb Time
Adjustable range: 1.0 to 5.0s
Reverb Time parameter adjusts the attenuation time of the
rear reverberant sound based on the time that about 1kHz
reverberant sound takes for 60dB of attenuation.
Reverberant sound attenuates faster as you decrease the
value. Reverb Time adjustment allows you to create a
natural reverberant sound, by setting the attenuation time
longer for a sound source or room with less echo, or
shorter for a sound source or room with more echo.
Rear reverberation
Source sound
Rear
reverberation
Early reflections
Small = 0.1
Large = 2.0
60dB
■
Parameters for defining attenuation
characteristics of early-reflected sound
60dB
Time
Time
Reverb Time
Reverb Time
Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Liveness / P. Liveness / Sur. Liveness / Sur. Back
Liveness
Adjustable range: 0 to 10
Source sound
Level
Dead
Time
Level
Live
Time
Sound source
Small = 1.0s
Large = 5.0s
Reverb Delay
Adjustable range: 0 to 250ms
Reverb Delay parameter adjusts the time difference
between the beginning of the direct sound and the
beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value,
the later the reverberation sound begins. Increasing the
value of Reverb Delay allows you to create a reverberant
sound in a wider area for the same Reverb Time.
Level
Adjusts the attenuation of reflected sound. You can create
a lively sound field (with a high reverberant sound level)
as you increase the value, and a dead sound field (with a
low reverberant sound level) as you decrease the value.
Creating either a lively sound field or a dead sound field in
an actual music hall is determined by the acoustic
absorption characteristics of reflection surfaces. A dead
sound field is created when the attenuation time is short
while a lively sound field is created when the attenuation
time is long.
Source sound
(dB)
Small reflected
sound
60dB
Large reflected
sound
Reverberation
Time
Small = 0
Large = 10
Reverb Delay
56 En
Reverb Time
Operating various settings for this unit (Setup menu)
■
Reverb Level
Adjustable range: 0 to100%
Level
Source sound
Effect Level
Choices:
High*, Low
Adjusts the Compressed Music Enhancer effect level.
When the high-frequency signals of the source is
emphasized too much, set the effect level to “Low”. To
reduce the effect, set this parameter to “Low”.
Decoder parameters
(dB)
■
Parameter for PLIIx Music and PLII Music
Panorama
Time
■
Parameter for MOVIE sound field programs
Decode Type
Choices:
PLIIx Movie (PLII Movie), Neo:6 Cinema
Selects the decoder type for use with the MOVIE sound
field programs.
Parameter for 2ch Stereo
Direct
Choices:
Auto*, Off
Automatically bypasses the DSP circuit and tone control
circuit when an analog sound source is selected as the
input source. You can enjoy a higher quality sound.
Auto Outputs sound by bypassing the DSP circuit and
tone control circuit when the “Bass” and “Treble”
tone controls are both set to 0 dB.
Off Do not bypass the DSP circuit and tone control.
Parameters for 7ch Stereo
Center Level / Surround L Level / Surround R
Level / Surround Back Level / Presence L Level /
Presence R Level
Adjustable range: 0 to 100%
You can spread the center sound toward left and right
according to your preference. Set this parameter to 0 for
outputting the center sound from the center speaker only,
or to 7 for outputting it from the front left/right speaker.
■
Parameter for Neo:6 Music
Center Image
Adjustable range: 0.0 to 0.3* to 1.0
Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to
the center channel to make the center channel more or less
dominant as necessary.
Memory Guard
Choices:
Off*, On
Protects the Setup menu settings against accidental
alteration.
Off
On
Not protect settings.
Protects the Setup menu settings (except for
“Decode Type” in “DSP Parameter” and
“Memory Guard”).
Note
• When this parameter is switched to “On”, “
corner of the Setup menu screen.
” appears at the top left
57 En
English
Adjusts the volume of the center, surround L/R, surround
back and presence L/R channels in the 7ch Stereo
program. The available parameters differ depending on the
setting of the speakers.
Center Width
Adjustable range: 0 to 3* to 7
APPENDIX
■
Adjusts the difference in level between the front sound
field and the surround sound field. You can adjust the
difference in level created by the software being played
back to obtain the preferred sound balance. The surround
sound gets stronger as you make the value more negative
and the front sound gets stronger as you make the value
more positive.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■
Dimension
Adjustable range: –3 to STD* to +3
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Note
• You cannot select a decoder for the following MOVIE sound field
programs.
– Mono Movie
– Sports
– Action Game
– Roleplaying Game
Off*, On
Adjusts the soundscape of the front sound field. Sends
stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front
speakers for a wraparound effect.
BASIC
OPERATION
Parameters for certain sound field
programs
Choices:
PREPARATION
You can customize decoder effects by setting the
following parameters. For details about the types of
decoders, see “Surround decode mode” (page 29).
Reverb Level
INTRODUCTION
Reverb Level parameter adjusts the reverberation sound
level. Increasing the value of Reverb Level makes the
reverbration sound level higher, which allows you to
create more echo.
Parameter for Straight Enhancer and 7ch
Enhancer
Using multi-zone configuration
This unit allows you to configure a multi-zone audio system. This feature allows you to set this unit to reproduce separate
input sources in the main zone, second zone (Zone2) and third zone (Zone3). You can control this unit from the second
zone or third zone using the supplied remote control.
Only analog signal can be sent to the second and third zones. If you want to output sounds to Zone2/3, connect an
external component to the AV5-6 or AUDIO1-2 jacks (by analog connection). For example, if you want to output
sound from an HDMI DVD player to the second zone, you must connect the HDMI DVD player to this unit by both
HDMI and analog connections.
Connecting Zone2/3
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-zone functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second zone and/or third zone.
• An infrared signal emitter in the main zone. This emitter transmits infrared signals from the remote control to a CD
player or a DVD player, etc. in the main zone via the infrared signal receiver in the second zone and/or third zone.
• An amplifier and speakers in the second zone and/or third zone.
y
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-zone configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest
authorized Yamaha dealer or service center about the Zone2/3 connections that best meet your requirements.
• Some Yamaha models can be directly connected to the REMOTE jacks of this unit. You may not need use an infrared signal emitter for these products. Up
to 6 components can be connected using monaural analog mini cables or via an IR flashers. For details about connections, see “Transmitting/receiving
remote control signals” (page 18).
Using external amplifiers
Connect an amplifier/receiver in the second zone and/or third zone and other components to this unit as follows.
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT
VIDEO
SPEAKERS
S
ZO
REMOTE
PR
IN
OUT
VIDEO
PB
Y
FRONT
CENTER
SURROUND
SING
CENTER
FRONT
O1
SUR.BACK
SUBWOOFER
ZONE2
OUT
FRONT
ZONE3
OUT
SURROUND
SUR. B
PRE O
L
R
Zone2 amplifier
(Yamaha component)
L
R
Analog audio output
IR receiver
in Zone2
AUDIO
OUT
Analog audio output
58 En
SURROUND
MULTI CH INPUT
Remote control out
Remote control in
IR flasher or
Yamaha component
(DVD player, etc)
AUDIO2
Zone3 amplifier
Using multi-zone configuration
From the ZONE3 OUT jacks
From the ZONE2 OUT jacks
INTRODUCTION
Amplifier
Amplifier
Analog audio signals only
This unit
DVD player etc.
Remote control
MAIN
Third zone
(Zone 3)
ZONE 3
PREPARATION
ZONE 2
Infrared signal
receiver
Infrared signal
emitter
Second zone
(Zone 2)
Main zone
From the REMOTE OUT jack
To the REMOTE IN jack
If you want to use one internal amplifier of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 speakers directly to the SP1 terminals and then set “Extra Speaker Assignment” to “Zone2”
(page 49)
Zone2 speakers
SP1
ZONE2/PRESENCE
SP2
ZONE3
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
If you want to use two internal amplifiers of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 and Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 terminals and then set “Extra Speaker Assignment”
to “Zone2 + Zone3” (page 49).
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Important safety notice
The EXTRA SP terminals of this unit should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than
one loudspeaker per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low
impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This
information is found on the back panel of your unit.
BASIC
OPERATION
Using the internal amplifiers of this unit
Zone3 speakers
APPENDIX
This unit
y
• You can use the speakers connected to EXTRA SP (SP1/SP2) terminals as the front speaker system of another zone.
• When you use the internal amplifiers for the Zone2/3 speakers, you can adjust the volume level and set the initial volume and maximum volume of the
Zone2/3 speakers (page 53).
English
59 En
Using multi-zone configuration
Operations in the Zone2/3 operation mode
Controlling Zone2/3
You can select and control Zone2/3 by using the control
keys on the front panel or on the remote control. The
available operations are as follows:
• Selecting the input source.
• Tuning into the desired station (when “TUNER” is
selected as the input source)
• Adjusting the volume of Zone2/3 (when Zone2/3
speakers are connected to the EXTRA SP terminals).
Switching to the Zone2/3 operation mode
Before controlling Zone2/3 by using the control keys on
the front panel or on the remote control, follow the
procedure below to switch this unit to the Zone2/3
operation mode.
■
To control Zone2/3 by using the front panel
control keys
Press DZONE CONTROLS repeatedly to select
the zone you want to control while the target
zone is turned on.
The zone indicator flashes on the front panel display for
approximately 10 seconds.
ZONE
2
Flashes
or
ZONE
3
■
Turning on or set Zone2 to standby
Press AZONE2 ON/OFF (or pPOWER).
■
Turning on or set Zone3 to standby
Press CZONE3 ON/OFF (or pPOWER).
■
Operating Zone2/3
Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press dInput
selection key) to select the desired input
source.
If you press dUSB/NET on the remote control, press
wSub-input selection key to select a sub-input
source.
• Select “AV5”, “AV6”, “AUDIO1”, “AUDIO2” or
“PHONO” to listen to the input source in the selected
zone.
• Select “DOCK” to use the iPod features (page 35) or
Bluetooth features (page 37) in the selected zone.
• Select “TUNER” to use the FM/AM radio features
(page 31) in the selected zone.
• Select “USB” to use the USB features (page 38) in the
selected zone.
• Select “NET RADIO” to use the Internet Radio features
(page 41) in the selected zone.
• Select “PC” to use the PC features (page 39) in the
selected zone.
Flashes
Note
Note
• Complete each step while the zone indicator is flashing on the front panel
display. Otherwise, the Zone2 or Zone3 operation mode is automatically
canceled and this unit returns to the main zone operation mode.
■
To control Zone2/3 by using the remote
control
Switch bZone selection switch to “ZONE2”
or “ZONE3” position.
60 En
• The sub-input source (USB, NET RADIO and PC) for “USB/NET” is
shared among all zones (main, Zone2 and Zone3). You cannot select
different sub-input source for each zone.
Controlling other components with the remote control
You can control external components for a selected input source with the remote control. The keys available for
controlling external components are as follows:
Input source
jCursor, ENTER, RETURN
Operates the menus of external components.
kExternal component operation keys
Function as a recording or playback key of an external
component, or a menu display key.
mTV control keys
[DOCK]
DOCK
Yamaha
5011 (fixed)
[TUNER]
Tuner
Yamaha
5007 (fixed)
[USB/NET]
—
Yamaha
— (fixed)
“—” indicates no assignment
y
• An external component controlled by the remote control is automatically
selected according to selection of the scenes (page 24).
Setting remote control codes
Switches visual inputs of TV
Mutes audio of TV
Controls the volume of TV
Switches channels of TV
Turns on and off TV
uDISPLAY
Switches between the screens of external components.
y
The following remote control codes are assigned to input
sources as factory default settings.
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. For a complete list of
available remote control codes, refer to “List of remote
control codes” at the end of this manual.
You should perform each step within 1 minute after the
previous step.
Press oCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
nTRANSMIT blinks twice.
2
Press the desired dInput selection key.
To use mTV control keys to control your TV,
assign a remote control code for your TV to dAV1,
dAV4 or dPHONO.
3
Press lNumeric keys to enter a remote
control code.
Once the remote control code is registered,
nTRANSMIT blinks twice. If it fails,
nTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat from
step 1.
Default remote control code settings
Input source
Category
Manufacturer
Default
code
[HDMI 1]
Blu-ray Disc
Yamaha
2018
[HDMI 2]
—
—
—
[HDMI 3]
—
—
—
[HDMI 4]
—
—
—
[AV 1]
—
—
—
[AV 2]
—
—
—
Note
Resetting all remote control codes
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
1
ADVANCED
OPERATION
• You can use mTV control keys to control your TV regardless of a
selected input source if a remote control code for your TV is assigned to
dAV1, dAV4 or dPHONO (in the order of descending priorities).
• You need to set the remote control code first to control external
components.
• The remote control keys for controlling external components are
available only when the external components have corresponding control
keys.
■
Default
code
BASIC
OPERATION
INPUT
MUTE
TV VOL +/–
TV CH +/–
POWER
Manufacturer
PREPARATION
lNumeric keys
Function as numeric keys of an external component.
Category
INTRODUCTION
cSOURCE POWER
Turns on and off an external component.
You can reset all remote control codes to the factory
default settings.
Yamaha
5013
[AV 4]
—
—
—
1
[AV 5]
—
—
—
[AV 6]
—
—
—
[AUDIO 1]
—
—
—
Press oCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as a tip of a
ballpoint pen.
nTRANSMIT blinks twice.
[AUDIO 2]
—
—
—
2
Press iON SCREEN.
[V-AUX]
—
—
—
3
[PHONO]
—
—
—
[MULTI]
—
—
—
Press lNumeric keys to enter “9981”.
Once the initialization is complete, nTRANSMIT
blinks twice. If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six
times. Repeat from step 1.
61 En
English
CD
APPENDIX
[AV 3]
• This operation also clears the programmed function of each key
(page 62).
Controlling other components with the remote control
Programming from other remote
controls
You can program remote control codes from other remote
controls. Use this feature if you want to program functions
not included in the basic operations covered by the remote
control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not
available.
6
y
• Repeat steps 4 thorough 6 to assign a function to another key.
7
Note
<Note>
• Each of the steps described in this section should be performed within
one minute after the last step. If the next operation is not performed
within one minute, the programming operation is canceled. In this case,
start again from the beginning.
Programming the remote control of this unit
You can program the remote control to make functions of
an external component operable with the following keys.
You can assign functions to these keys for each input
source as with remote control codes.
cSOURCE POWER
kExternal component operation keys
lNumeric keys
y
• The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the remote control of the
external component also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn
most of its functions. The remote control may not recognize special or
consecutive signals.
• The keys may not operate the assigned functions depending on operating
conditions of this unit.
1
Press oCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
nTRANSMIT blinks twice.
Press the key on the remote control of the
external component.
If the learning process is complete, nTRANSMIT
blinks twice. If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six
times. Repeat from step 4.
To end the operation, press oCODE SET
again.
nTRANSMIT blinks once.
Clearing the assignment of each key
1
Press oCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
nTRANSMIT blinks twice.
2
Press the desired dInput selection key.
3
Press lNumeric keys to enter “9991”.
4
Press a key you want to reset.
If the key assignment is cleared, nTRANSMIT
blinks twice. If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six
times. Repeat from step 1.
y
• Repeat step 4 to clear another key assignment.
5
To end the operation, press oCODE SET
again.
nTRANSMIT blinks once.
2
Press the desired dInput selection key.
3
Press lNumeric keys to enter “9990”.
1
4
Press a key to which you want to assign the
function.
nTRANSMIT lights up and this unit enters a wait
state to receive remote control signals. Perform steps
5 and 6 within 10 seconds.
Press oCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
nTRANSMIT blinks twice.
2
Press the desired dInput selection key.
Note
3
Press lNumeric keys to enter “9992”.
If the key assignments are cleared, nTRANSMIT
blinks twice. If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six
times. Repeat from step 1.
<Note>
5
• If 10 seconds pass after this unit enters the wait state, a timeout
error occurs and nTRANSMIT turns off. In this case, repeat
from step 4.
Place the remote control about 5 to 10 cm
apart from the remote control of the external
component on a flat surface so that their
infrared transmitters are aimed at each other.
Remote control of external component
MAIN
SOURCE
3
3
CODE SET
4
4
USB/NET
AUDIO
TUNING
POWER
2
SLEEP
DOCK
HDMI
1
2
MULTI
AV
6
2
PHONO
PRESET
RADIO
ENHANCER SUR. DECODE
ZONE 2
ZONE 3 TRANSMIT
POWER
1
1
5
V-AUX
AM
HDMI
MEMORY
TUNER
FM
CD
STEREO
VOLUME
STRAIGHT PURE DIRECT
OPTION
DISPLAY
SCENE
TV
MOVIE
MUSIC
ENTER
INFO
BD
DVD
HDMI OUT
ON SCREEN
RETURN
5 to 10 cm
62 En
Clearing the assignments of all keys
Advanced setup
1
Set this unit to standby.
2
While holding down QSTRAIGHT on the
front panel, press LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF.
Keep holding down QSTRAIGHT until
“ADVANCED SETUP” appears on the front panel
display.
Initializes various settings stored in this unit. You can
select an initialization method from the following.
DSP PARAM: All parameters of sound field
programs
VIDEO
Video conversion settings (resolution/
aspect) in the Setup menu and the GUI
display position
NETWORK Network settings in the Setup menu
ALL
All
CANCEL
Cancellation of initialization
Choices:
ADVANCEDSETUP
3
USB FirmUpdate
NET FirmUpdate
Updates the firmware of this unit. For details on how
to update the firmware, refer to information supplied
with updates.
y
• Set values are placed in XXX of the following parameters on an
actual display screen.
Notes
• Do not use this feature unless you need to update the firmware.
• Be sure to read information supplied with updates before updating
the firmware.
SP IMP. -XXX
6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN*
VERXXX.XXX.XXX
Displays the firmware of this unit.
Press QSTRAIGHT repeatedly to change
the selected parameter setting.
To change other settings, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5
Press LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF to set this
unit to standby.
The settings you made are reflected next time you
turn on this unit.
RS232C STBY -X
Choices:
Y (Yes), N (No)*
Selects whether or not to transmit data via the RS232C terminal when this unit is in the standby mode.
REMOTE ID -XXX
Choices:
ID1*, ID2
Sets a remote control ID. When using multiple
Yamaha AV receivers, you can operate them with a
single remote control by setting the receiver IDs to
the same setting.
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
4
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Selects output impedance of this unit according to
connected speakers. When you connect 4-ohm
speakers to the FRONT speaker terminals, set “SP
IMP.” to “6ΩMIN.”.
BASIC
OPERATION
Rotate the PPROGRAM selector to select
the parameter you want to change.
The default setting are marked with “*”.
Choices:
DSP PARAM, VIDEO, NETWORK, ALL,
CANCEL*
PREPARATION
INIT-XXXXXXXXX
INTRODUCTION
In the advanced setup menu, you can set basic operations
of this unit, such as on and off of a bi-amp connection, or
initialize user settings.
BI AMP - XXX
Choices:
ON, OFF*
Switches on and off of bi-amp connection of main
speakers. For bi-amp connection, see page 12.
APPENDIX
SCENE IR -XXX
Choices:
ON*, OFF
Selects whether or not to transmit the control signals
to an external component connected to the REMOTE
OUT jack on this unit when BD/DVD or CD SCENE
function is selected.
MON.CHK - XXXX
YES*, SKIP
English
Choices:
Adds upscaling limitation on output signals to a video
monitor connected to this unit via the HDMI OUT
jack.
63 En
Advanced setup
Setting a remote control ID
Two IDs are provided for the remote control of this unit. If
another Yamaha amplifier is in the same room, setting a
different remote control ID to this unit prevents unwanted
operation of the other amplifier.
“ID1” is set for both the main unit and remote control by
default. If you have changed the remote control ID, make
sure that you select the same ID for the main unit in the
the advanced setup menu.
y
• For details on how to set the remote control ID of the simplified remote
control, see page 8.
1
Press oCODE SET on the remote control
using a pointed object such as the tip of a
ballpoint pen.
nTRANSMIT blinks twice.
2
Press iON SCREEN.
3
Enter the desired remote control ID code.
To switch to ID1, press lNumeric keys to enter
“5019”.
To switch to ID2, press lNumeric keys to enter
“5020”.
Once the remote control code is registered,
nTRANSMIT blinks twice.
If it fails, nTRANSMIT blinks six times. Repeat
from step 1.
y
• If you initialize the settings of this unit, “REMOTE ID” (remote control
code of this unit) is set to “ID1”.
64 En
APPENDIX
Troubleshooting
General
Problem
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet,
wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again.
—
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode
The internal temperature is too high and
the overheat protection circuitry has been
activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.
63
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off this unit.
Turn on this unit and play the source again.
—
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable properly to an AC wall
outlet.
20
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
63
(When this unit is turned back on and
“CHECK SP WIRES!” is displayed.) The
protection circuitry has been activated
because this unit was turned on while a
speaker cable was shorted.
Make sure that all speaker cables between this unit
and speakers are connected properly.
11
The internal microcomputer is frozen due
to an external electric shock (such as
lightning or excessive static electricity) or
by a drop in power supply voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet,
wait about 30 seconds and then plug it in again.
—
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
This unit cannot be
turned off.
APPENDIX
The internal microcomputer is frozen due
to an external electric shock (such as
lightning or excessive static electricity) or
by a drop in power supply voltage.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit does not
operate properly.
BASIC
OPERATION
Remedy
PREPARATION
See
page
Cause
INTRODUCTION
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
Yamaha dealer or service center.
English
65 En
Troubleshooting
Problem
No picture.
Cause
Remedy
See
page
An appropriate video input is not selected
on the video monitor.
Select an appropriate video input on the video
monitor.
—
An appropriate HDMI OUT jack is not
selected.
Select the HDMI OUT jack which your video
monitor is connected.
42
The external video component is
connected to one of the HDMI 1-4 jacks
or HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack while
your video monitor is connected to the
MONITOR OUT (COMPONENT
VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks.
Connect the external video component to the video
input jacks other than the HDMI 1-4 jacks or connect
the video monitor to one of the HDMI OUT jacks or
HDMI IN (VIDEO AUX) jack.
This unit outputs the video signals not
supported by the video monitor connected
to one of the HDMI OUT jacks.
Displays the advanced setup menu and select
“VIDEO” in “INIT” to reset the video parameters.
63
Displays the advanced setup menu and set
“MON.CHK” to “YES”.
63
Video signals are input from a game
console while your video monitor is
connected to one of the HDMI OUT jacks.
Connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO) jacks.
14
Non-standard video signals are input.
Connect the video monitor to the MONITOR OUT
(COMPONENT VIDEO or VIDEO) jacks.
14
14, 16
The picture is
disturbed.
The video software is copy-protected.
No sound.
Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
16
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Rotate the TINPUT selector (or press dInput
selection key) to select the desired input source.
24
Speaker connections are not secure.
Secure the connections.
11
The volume is turned down or muted.
Turn up the volume.
24
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Display “Signal Info” in the Option menu and check
the input signal format.
If “No Signal” is displayed, check if the playback
component is properly connected to this unit (or a
proper input source is selected).
If “___” is displayed, the input signal in that format
cannot be reproduced by this unit.
—
The HDMI components connected to this
unit do not support the HDCP copy
protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP
copy protection standards.
80
“Audio Output” in “HDMI” is set to
“TV”.
Set “Audio Output” (Function Setup → HDMI →
Audio Output) to the other setting.
51
A proper audio decoder is not selected.
Display the Option menu and set “Decoder Mode” to
“Auto”.
43
When a monaural source sound field
program is applied, sound of all channels
are output from the center speaker for
some surround decoders.
Try another sound field program.
27
The playback component or speakers are
not connected properly.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
66 En
12, 16
Troubleshooting
Problem
See
page
6, 24, 27,
48
The volume of that speaker is set to
minimum in “Speaker Setup” in the
“Setup” menu.
Display “Speaker Setup” in the “Setup” menu and
adjust the volume (Manual Setup → Speaker Level).
50
This unit is in the straight decode mode.
Press QSTRAIGHT (or rSTRAIGHT) to turn
off the straight decode mode.
30
Sound may not be output from certain
channels depending on input sources or
sound field programs.
Try another sound field program.
27
The speaker is malfunction.
Check the speaker indicators on the front panel
display. If the corresponding indicator lights up,
connect another speaker and check if sound is output.
If sound is not output, this unit may be malfunction.
—
“LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Front” and a
Dolby Digital, DTS or AAC signals is
being played.
Set “LFE / Bass Out” to “Subwoofer” or “Both”.
49
“LFE / Bass Out” is set to “Subwoofer” or
“Front” and a 2-channel source is being
played.
Set “LFE / Bass Out” to “Both”.
49
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Check the Speaker indicators on the front panel
display. If the corresponding indicator is turned off,
try the following.
1) Change the input source to another one.
2) With the selected sound field program, sound is not
output from that speaker. Select another sound field
program.
3) “None” may have been selected for that speaker on
this unit. Display “Speaker Setup” in the “Setup”
menu and enables output of that speaker.
BASIC
OPERATION
Output from that speaker is disabled.
PREPARATION
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
Remedy
INTRODUCTION
No sound is output
from a specific
speaker.
Cause
The source does not contain low
frequency signals.
“Extended Surround” in the Option menu
is set to “Off”, or an input signal does not
contain a surround back flag with
“Extended Surround” set to “Auto”.
Set “Extended Surround” other than “Off” or “Auto”.
43
The audio input
sources cannot be
played in the desired
digital audio signal
format.
The connected component is not set to
output the desired digital audio signals.
Set the playback component properly referring to its
operating instructions.
—
Multi-channel
playback is not
available.
The connected component is set to output
2-ch or PCM signals.
Set the playback component properly referring to its
operating instructions.
—
“Audio Output” is set to “Amplifier +
TV”.
Set “Audio Output” to “Amplifier”.
51
APPENDIX
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speakers.
English
67 En
Troubleshooting
Problem
Noise/hum noise is
heard.
Cause
Remedy
See
page
Incorrect cable connection.
Connect the audio cables properly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
A DTS-CD is being played back.
1) When only noise is output
If a DTS bitstream signal is not properly input to this
unit, only noise is output. Connect the playback
component to this unit by digital connection and play
back the DTS-CD. If the condition is not improved,
the problem may results from the playback
component. Consult the manufacturer of the playback
component.
2) When noise is output during playback or skip
operation
Before playing back the DTS-CD, display the Option
menu after selecting the input source and set
“Decoder Mode” to “DTS”.
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the AUDIO
1/2 jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power of the component.
61
“Memory Guard!” is
displayed and the
setting cannot be
changed.
“Memory Guard” in “Set Menu” is set to
“On”.
Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”.
57
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to other digital or
radio frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
16, 43
HDMI™
Problem
No picture or sound.
68 En
Cause
Remedy
See
page
The number of the connected HDMI
components is over the limit.
Disconnect some of the HDMI components.
—
The connected HDMI component does not
support high-bandwidth digital copyright
protection (HDCP).
Connect an HDMI component that supports HDCP.
80
Troubleshooting
Tuner (FM/AM)
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
You are too far from the station
transmitter or the input from the
antenna is weak.
Remedy
See
page
Check the antenna connections.
20
Replace the outdoor antenna with a more
sensitive multi-element antenna.
—
Switch to monaural mode.
44
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
You are in an area far from a station or
an input from the antenna is weak.
Replace an outdoor antenna with more
sensitive multi element antenna.
—
Tune in manually or by direct frequency
tuning.
31
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Adjust the AM loop antenna orientation.
20
Use the manual tuning method.
31
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Supplied AM loop antenna is not
connected.
Connect the AM loop antenna correctly even
if you use an outdoor antenna.
20
The noises may be caused by lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
It is difficult to completely eliminate noise,
but it can be reduced by installing and
properly grounding an outdoor AM antenna.
20
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby.
Move this unit away from the TV set.
—
AM stations cannot be
preset by automatic
station preset.
Only FM Radio Data System
broadcasting stations are stored
automatically by automatic station
preset.
Register AM stations by manual station
preset.
32
AM
APPENDIX
Adjust the antenna height or orientation, or
place it in a different location.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
There is multi-path interference.
BASIC
OPERATION
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
PREPARATION
FM
Cause
INTRODUCTION
Problem
English
69 En
Troubleshooting
Remote control
Problem
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
Cause
Remedy
See
page
Wrong distance or angle.
The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees
offaxis from the front panel.
6
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, strobe
light, etc.) is striking the remote control
sensor of this unit.
Adjust the lighting angle or reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak.
Replace all batteries.
6, 8
The remote control ID of the remote
control and this unit do not match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit and the
remote control.
64
The remote control code is not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using “List of
remote control codes” at the end of this manual.
61
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer
using “List of remote control codes” at the end of this
manual.
61
If this unit does not work when you press jCursor,
do the following.
When the key does not work during DVD disc menu
operation: press the dInput selection keys on
the remote control again.
When the key does not work during Option menu or
Setup menu operation: press the key applicable for
the current menu operation again.
—
The batteries of remote control of this unit
(or the external component) are weak.
Replace the batteries
6
The distance between the two remote
controls is too long or too short.
Place the remote controls at a proper distance.
62
The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.
Learning is not possible.
—
Memory capacity is full.
Delete unnecessary functions to free some memory
space for the new functions.
62
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
The remote control
does not learn new
functions.
iPod™
Note
• In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing on the front panel display and GUI screen, check the connection of your iPod
(page 18).
Status message
Loading...
Cause
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your iPod.
This unit is in the middle of acquiring
song lists from your iPod.
70 En
Remedy
See
page
Troubleshooting
Status message
Connect error
Cause
The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
iPod Connected
Your iPod is properly placed in the
Yamaha iPod universal dock.
Disconnected
Your iPod is removed from the Yamaha
iPod universal dock.
Unable to play
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your iPod.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the Yamaha iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
18
Remove your iPod in the Yamaha iPod universal dock
and then place it back in the dock.
35
Use an iPod supported by this unit.
—
35
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod
are playable.
—
PREPARATION
Unknown iPod
See
page
INTRODUCTION
There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Remedy
Bluetooth™
Searching...
Cause
Remedy
See
page
The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and
the Bluetooth component are in the
middle of the pairing.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
The Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and
the Bluetooth component are in the
middle of establishing the connection.
BASIC
OPERATION
Status message
The pairing is completed.
Canceled
The pairing is canceled.
BT Connected
The connection between the Yamaha
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver and the
Bluetooth component is established.
Disconnected
The Bluetooth component is disconnected
from the Yamaha Bluetooth wireless
audio receiver.
Not Found
No Bluetooth components are found
during a pairing process.
Pairing must be performed on the both this unit and
your Bluetooth component at the same time. Check
whether your Bluetooth component is set to the
paring mode and then try again.
37
No Bluetooth components are found
during a Bluetooth connection.
Check whether your Bluetooth component is turned
on and then try again.
37
Locate your Bluetooth component within 10 meters
(33 feet) of this unit and then try again.
37
APPENDIX
Completed
English
71 En
Troubleshooting
USB and network
Cause
The music files and
folders in the USB
storage device cannot
be browsed.
The music files and folders are stored the
locations other than the FAT area.
Place the music files and folders in the FAT area.
—
You are attempting to browse directory
hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory
with more than 500 files.
Modify the data structure on your USB storage
device.
—
This unit cannot recognize some
characters used in the file name or folder
name.
Edit the file name or folder name using a PC and then
try again.
—
The USB storage device is not compatible
with mass storage class (except USB
HDDs).
Use a USB storage device that is compatible with
mass storage class (except USB HDDs).
—
This unit does not recognize the USB
storage device properly.
Turn this unit off and then turn on again.
20
The PC server/
Internet Radio does
not function properly.
The network cable is not connected
properly.
Connect the network cable properly.
19
The IP address is not set properly.
Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON.
Alternately, perform manual configuration according
to the current operating environment.
53
The music on the PC
server cannot be
played back.
The PC does not have Windows Media
Player 11 installed on it.
Install Windows Media Player 11 on the PC.
—
The music is recorded in a format that
cannot be played on this unit. This unit
cannot play music formats other than
WAV (PCM format only), MP3, WMA,
MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC. Also note some
music files cannot be played regardless of
the file formats.
Play music recorded in a format that this unit is
compatible with.
—
Internet Radio
stations cannot be
played.
The firewall of the network device is
activated. Internet Radio stations can only
be played when the signal pass through
the port designated by the individual radio
stations. The port number varies from
station to station.
Check the firewall setting of the network device.
—
Connection to the Internet is not available.
Check the configuration of the network device and
contact your Internet service provider.
—
The USB storage
device cannot be
recognized.
Status message
Cause
USB Connected
Your USB storage device is connected.
USB Disconnected
Your USB storage device has been
disconnected from the USB port of this
unit.
72 En
Remedy
See
page
Problem
Remedy
See
page
—
Check the connection between this unit and your
USB storage device.
—
Troubleshooting
Status message
Access Error
Cause
Remedy
Try another USB storage device.
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB storage device to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB storage
device to the USB port of this unit.
—
19, 20
This unit cannot connect to the data server
due to network error, etc.
Check the network settings and contact your Internet
service provider.
53
Access Denied
The PC you are attempting to connect has
denied connection.
Configure the sharing setting of Windows Media
Player 11 and select this unit as a device to which
music contents are shared.
39
Unable to play
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your PC.
Make sure Windows Media Player 11 is installed on
your PC.
—
Play music recorded in a format that this unit is
compatible with (WAV (PCM format only), MP3,
WMA, MPEG-4 AAC or FLAC).
—
You are attempting to play back expired
digital rights management (DRM)
encrypted content.
Select a file that is not protected by DRM
—
Windows Media Player 11 does not
acquire the digital rights management
(DRM) license for the file.
Acquire the license to play back the file on Windows
Media Player 11.
—
License unavailable
BASIC
OPERATION
—
PREPARATION
Try resetting your USB storage device.
INTRODUCTION
This unit cannot access your USB storage
device.
See
page
ADVANCED
OPERATION
APPENDIX
English
73 En
Troubleshooting
Auto Setup (YPAO)
Notes
•
•
•
•
If the an error or warning message appears, resolve the problem and then run “Auto Setup” again.
Warning message “W-2” or “W-3” indicates that the adjusted settings may not be optimal.
Depending on the speakers, warning message “W-1” may appears even if the speaker connections are correct.
If error message “E-10” occurs repeatedly, contact a qualified Yamaha service center.
Before Auto Setup
Error message
Cause
Remedy
See
page
Connect MIC!
Optimizer microphone is not connected.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
21
Unplug HP!
Headphones are connected.
Unplug the headphones.
—
Memory Guard!
The parameters of this unit are protected.
Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”.
57
During Auto Setup
Error message
Cause
Remedy
See
page
E-1:NO FRONT SP
Front L/R channel signals are not
detected.
Check the front L/R speaker connections.
11
E-2:NO SUR. SP
Only a signal from one of the surround
channels are detected.
Check the surround L/R speaker connections.
11
E-3:NO PRNS SP
Only signals from one of the presence L/
R channels are detected.
Check the presence L/R speaker connections.
11
E-4:SBR->SBL
Only right surround back channel signal
is detected.
If you connect only one surround back speaker,
connect it to the left SUR.BACK (SINGLE) jack.
11
E-5:NOISY
Measurement cannot be performed
accurately due to loud ambient noise.
Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet environment.
—
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners or move them away from the optimizer
microphone.
—
E-6:CHECK SUR.
Surround back speakers are connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
When using surround back speakers, you need to
connect surround L/R speakers.
11
E-7:NO MIC
The optimizer microphone was
unplugged during the “Auto Setup”
procedure.
Do not touch the optimizer microphone during “Auto
Setup”.
21
E-8:NO SIGNAL
The optimizer microphone does not
detect test tones.
Check whether the microphone is properly placed.
21
Check whether the speakers are properly placed and
connected.
10, 11
The optimizer microphone or OPTIMIZER MIC
jack may be defective. Contact the nearest Yamaha
dealer or service center.
—
E-9:USER CANCEL
“Auto Setup” was canceled due to an
inappropriate user operation.
Run “Auto Setup” again.
21
E-10:INTERNAL
ERROR
An internal error occurred.
Run “Auto Setup” again.
21
74 En
Troubleshooting
After Auto Setup
Cause
Remedy
See
page
Speaker polarity is not correct. This
message may appear depending on the
speakers even when the speakers are
connected correctly.
Check the polarities (+, –) of the displayed speaker.
If they are correct, the speakers work properly even
when this message is displayed.
12
W-2:OVER 24m (80ft)
The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).
Bring the speaker within 24 m (80 ft.) area around
the listening position.
—
W-3:LEVEL ERROR
The difference of volume level among
speakers is excessive.
Recheck the speaker positions and make sure all
speakers are placed in a similar environment.
—
Check the polarities (+, –) of the speakers.
12
We recommended that you use speakers with the
same or similar specifications.
—
Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.
—
Presence speakers were not detected
during measurement with “Extra Speaker
Assignment” set to “Presence”.
Check the presence speaker connections and perform
measurement again. If presence speakers are not
connected, set the “Extra Speaker Assignment” to
other than “Presence”.
11, 49
BASIC
OPERATION
W-4:CHECK PRNS
PREPARATION
W-1:OUT OF PHASE
INTRODUCTION
Error message
ADVANCED
OPERATION
APPENDIX
English
75 En
Glossary
■
Audio and video synchronization (lip sync)
■
Dolby Digital Surround EX
Lip sync, an abbreviation for lip synchronization, is a technical term
that involves both a problem and a capability of maintaining audio and
video signals synchronized during post-production and transmission.
Whereas the audio and video latency requires complex end-user
adjustments, HDMI version 1.3 incorporates an automatic audio and
video syncing capability that allows devices to perform this
synchronization automatically and accurately without user interaction.
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1channel sources.
For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie
sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic
moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-over” and “flyaround” effects.
■
■
Bi-amplification connection
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker.
One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker
while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section.
With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted
frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a
much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the
sound in some way.
■
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated
into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the
chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this
system because each of these signals is independent. The component
signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with
component input jacks is required in order to output component
signals.
■
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed
of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and
synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component
transmits these three elements combined.
■
Deep Color
Deep Color refers to the use of various color depths in displays, up
from the 24-bit depths in previous versions of the HDMI specification.
This extra bit depth allows HDTVs and other displays go from
millions of colors to billions of colors and eliminate on-screen color
banding for smooth tonal transitions and subtle gradations between
colors. The increased contrast ratio can represent many times more
shades of gray between black and white. Also Deep Color increases
the number of available colors within the boundaries defined by the
RGB or YCbCr color space.
■
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you
completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels
(front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital
provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel
especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the
system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By
using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate
moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible
than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum
to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the
precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing
provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism.
With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
76 En
Dolby Digital Plus
Dolby Digital Plus is an advanced audio technology developed for
high-definition programming and media including HD broadcasts,
and Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray
Disc, this technology delivers multichannel sound with discrete
channel output. Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps, Dolby Digital
Plus can carry up to 7.1 discreet audio channels simultaneously.
Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed for the optical disc
players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future, Dolby Digital Plus
also remains fully compatible with the existing multichannel audio
systems that incorporate Dolby Digital.
■
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast
numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology
enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right
channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels
instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music
sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for
game sources.
■
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multichannel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources.
There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources,
“Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and
“Game mode” for game sources.
■
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser
discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. Dolby Surround
uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and
dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a
center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for
special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder
built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance
moving sound effects and directionality.
■
Dolby TrueHD
Dolby TrueHD is an advanced lossless audio technology developed
for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray Disc. Selected
as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this technology
delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio master, offering
a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 18.0 Mbps, Dolby TrueHD can carry up to 8
discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz audio simultaneously.
Dolby TrueHD also remains fully compatible with the existing
multichannel audio systems and retains the metadata capability of
Dolby Digital, allowing dialog normalization and dynamic range
control.
Glossary
■
DSD
■
DTS 96/24
■
DTS Digital Surround
DTS Express
This is an audio format for next-generation optical discs such as Bluray discs. It uses optimized low bit rate signals for network streaming.
In the case of a Blu-ray disc, this format is used with secondary audio,
enabling you to enjoy the commentary of the movie producer via the
Internet while playing the main program.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio is a high resolution audio
technology developed for high-definition disc-based media including
Blu-ray Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc,
this technology delivers sound that is virtually indistinguishable from
the original, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 6.0 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD High
Resolution Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96
kHz audio simultaneously.
DTS-HD High Resolution Audio also remains fully compatible with
the existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
Surround.
■
DTS-HD Master Audio
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range
of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as
0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the
full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■
MP3
One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the
irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression
rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears.
It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11
(128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD.
■
MPEG-4 AAC
An MPEG-4 audio standard. As it allows compression of data at a bit
rate lower than that of MPEG-2 AAC, it is used among others for
mobile telephones, portable audio players and other low-capacity
devices requiring high sound quality.
In addition to the above types of devices, MPEG-4 AAC is also used
to distribute contents on the Internet, and as such is supported by
computers, media servers and many other devices.
■
Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6- channel
playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the fullrange channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal
playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music
sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
■
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is
digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression.
This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM
system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the
analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording.
English
DTS-HD Master Audio is an advanced lossless audio technology
developed for high-definition disc-based media including Blu-ray
Disc. Selected as an optional audio standard for Blu-ray Disc, this
technology delivers sound that is bit-for-bit identical to the studio
master, offering a high-definition home theater experience.
Supporting bitrates up to 24.5 Mbps for Blu-ray Disc, DTS-HD
Master Audio can carry up to 7.1 discrete channels of 24-bit/96 kHz
audio simultaneously. Supported by HDMI version 1.3 and designed
for the optical disc players and AV receivers/amplifiers of the future,
DTS-HD Master Audio also remains fully compatible with the
existing multichannel audio systems that incorporate DTS Digital
Surround.
■
APPENDIX
■
HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industrysupported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing
an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver)
and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI
supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multichannel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC
HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with
bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and
requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface
that meets the security requirements of content providers and system
operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website
at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■
■
BASIC
OPERATION
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks
of movies with a 5.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly
gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. DTS, Inc. has
developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of
sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in
your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel
sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right,
and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This
unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-channel
reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1channel format.
FLAC
This is a file format for lossless audio data compression. FLAC is
inferior to lossy compression formats in compression rate but provides
higher audio quality.
PREPARATION
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multichannel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with
all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to
the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length.
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion
video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD
video.
■
INTRODUCTION
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on
digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals
are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of
2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to
reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization
of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality
can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal
audio CDs. The frequency is equal to or higher than 100 kHz and the
dynamic range is 120 dB. This unit can transmit or receive DSD
signals input from the HDMI jack.
77 En
Glossary
■
Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the
signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while
the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric
value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that
can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while
the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is
determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher
the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be
played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more
finely the sound level can be reproduced.
■
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of
recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It does
not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired
compression method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible
with the PCM method (no compression) and some compression
methods including the ADPCM method.
■
WMA
An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It
employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high
compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the
human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity
by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to
music CD.
■
“x.v.Color”
A color space standard supported by HDMI version 1.3. It is a more
extensive color space than sRGB, and allows the expression of colors
that could not be expressed before. While remaining compatible with
the color gamut of sRGB standards, “x.v.Color” expands the color
space and can thus produce more vivid, natural images. It is
particularly effective for still pictures and computer graphics.
78 En
Sound field program information
■
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Yamaha has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows
you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any
surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even
possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker
system that does not include a center speaker.
■
Compressed Music Enhancer
The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your
listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a
compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss
of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of
low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance
of the overall sound system.
BASIC
OPERATION
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface (for example, from the walls, and/or the ceiling) so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic afterglow. They are nondirectional and lessen the
clarity of the direct sound.
SILENT CINEMA
Yamaha has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm
for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each
sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberations taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening
environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those
of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually
any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will
is exactly what Yamaha has done with the digital sound
field processor.
APPENDIX
■
PREPARATION
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
■
INTRODUCTION
■ Elements of a sound field
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable
us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting. There are
two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to
make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound
coming straight to our ears from the playerfs instrument.
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed
for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having
many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions,
such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound
heard.
Based on a wealth of actually measured data, Yamaha CINEMA DSP
provides the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening
room of your own home by using the Yamaha original sound field
technology combined with various digital audio systems.
English
■ CINEMA DSP 3D
The actually measured sound field data contain the
information of the height of the sound images. CINEMA
DSP 3D feature achieves the reproduction of the accurate
height of the sound images so that it creates the accurate
and intensive stereoscopic sound fields in a listening
room.
79 En
Information on HDMI™
■
HDMI signal compatibility
Audio signals
Audio signal types
Audio signal formats
Compatible media
2ch Linear PCM
2ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch Linear PCM
8ch, 32 to 192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.
DSD
2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit
SA-CD, etc.
Bitstream
Dolby Digital, DTS
DVD-Video, etc.
Bitstream (High definition audio)
Dolby TrueHD, Dolby Digital Plus, DTS-HD
Master Audio, DTS-HD High Resolution Audio,
DTS Express
Blu-ray Disc, HD DVD, etc.
y
• If the input source component can decode the bitstream audio signals of audio commentaries, you can play back the audio sources with the audio
commentaries mixed down by using the following connections:
– multi-channel analog audio input (page 18)
– digital input (OPTICAL or COAXIAL)
• Refer to the supplied instruction manuals of the input source component, and set the component appropriately.
Notes
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD-Audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components.
• To decode audio bitstream signals on this unit, set the input source component appropriately so that the component outputs the bitstream audio signals
directly (does not decode the bitstream signals on the component). Refer to the supplied instruction manuals for details.
• This unit is not compatible with the audio commentary features (for example, the special audio contents downloaded via Internet) of Blu-ray Disc or HD
DVD. This unit does not play back the audio commentaries of the Blu-ray Disc or HD DVD contents.
Video signals
This unit is compatible with the video signals of the following resolutions:
• 480i/60 Hz
• 576i/50 Hz
• 480p/60 Hz
• 576p/50 Hz
• 720p/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 1080i/60 Hz, 50 Hz
• 1080p/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 24 Hz
80 En
Specifications
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models]............................. 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[General and Asia models]..........87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] .............................................. 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
Mono ...................................................................3.0 µV (20.8 dBf)
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo................................................................74 dB/70 dB
HD [U.S.A. model] ................................................................80 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo......................................................................0.3/0.3%
HD [U.S.A. model] ............................................................... 0.03%
• Antenna Input (unbalanced)....................................................... 75 Ω
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models]................................ 530 to 1710 kHz
[General and Asia models]................... 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ..................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
GENERAL
APPENDIX
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models]................................AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model] ................ AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] ......................................................AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] ......................................................AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] .................................................AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K., Europe and Russia models].......................AC 230 V, 50 Hz
[Asia model].....................................AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models]................................... 450 W/560 VA
[Other models] ..................................................................... 450 W
• Standby Power Consumption (reference data)
(HDMI Control/Standby Through/Network Standby: Off,
RS232C STBY: No) ................................................ 0.2 W or less
(HDMI Control/Standby Through/Network Standby: On)
No Repeat................................................................ 5.6 W or less
Repeat.................................................................... 10.6 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption
[General and Asia models]................................................... 680 W
• Dimensions (W x H x D) .................................. 435 x 171 x 365 mm
(17-1/8 x 6-3/4 x 14-3/8 in)
• Weight .................................................................... 12.4 kg (27.4 lbs)
ADVANCED
OPERATION
AM SECTION
BASIC
OPERATION
• Video Signal Type (Gray Back)
[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] ...................... NTSC
[Other models] ......................................................................... PAL
• Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)............................NTSC/PAL
• Signal Level
Composite ...................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video [U.K., Europe and Russia models]
........................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component ..................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75Ω (Cb/Cr)
• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion: Off)
............................................................................. 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio .................................................. 50 dB or more
• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]
Component (Video Conversion: Off)
.................................................................5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
PREPARATION
VIDEO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.08% THD, 8 Ω ...................................... 130 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
Front Speakers 8/6/4/2 Ω.................................160/200/260/330 W
• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)
[General, China, Korea, Australia and Asia models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................... 175 W
• Maximum Output Power [U.K, Europe and Russia models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ......................................................... 180 W
• Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A. and Canada models]
8 Ω ........................................................................................ 0.9 dB
• IEC Output Power [U.K, Europe and Russia models]
Front Speakers 1 kHz, 0.08% THD, 8 Ω .............................. 130 W
• Damping Factor (IHF)
Front Speakers, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω......................... 100 or more
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO ................................................................... 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
AV5, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Voltage
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD).................................. 60 mV or more
AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.3 V or more
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
AUDIO OUT ......................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ
PRE OUT....................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER (2ch Stereo, Front Speaker: Small)
.................................................................................1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE2/3 OUT ...................................................... 200 mV/1.4 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
AV5, etc. (1 kHz, 50 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 100 mV/470 Ω
• Frequency Response
AV5 to FRONT .................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO ..........................................................................0 ± 0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to AUDIO OUT
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ........................................... 0.02% or less
AV5, etc. to FRONT, Pure Direct
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)................................. 0.06% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO Input Shorted (5.0 mV to AUDIO OUT)
[U.S.A., Canada, General and China models] ......... 86 dB or more
[Other models] ......................................................... 81 dB or more
AV5, etc. Input Shorted (250 mV to Front Speakers)
............................................................................ 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front Speakers ......................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (Input Shorted) ................................60 dB/55 dB or more
AV5, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) .........................60 dB/45 dB or more
• Volume Control...................................... Mute / –80 dB to +16.5 dB
• Tone Control (Front Speakers)
Bass Boost/Cut ..................................................... ±10 dB at 50 Hz
Bass Turnover Frequency .................................................... 350 Hz
Treble Boost/Cut................................................. ±10 dB at 20 kHz
Treble Turnover Frequency................................................. 3.5 kHz
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back: Small)
..................................................................................... 12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .......................................................... 24 dB/oct.
INTRODUCTION
AUDIO SECTION
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
English
81 En
Index
■
Numerics
2ch Stereo, sound field program .................... 28
5.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10
6.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10
7.1-channel speaker layout ............................ 10
7ch Enhancer, sound field program ............... 29
7ch Stereo, sound field program .................... 29
■
A
AC IN, rear panel ............................................. 5
Action Game, sound field program ............... 28
Adaptive DRC, Volume, Function Setup ...... 52
Adjusting high frequency sound .................... 25
Adjusting low frequency sound ..................... 25
Advanced setup .............................................. 63
Adventure, sound field program .................... 27
AM antenna connection ................................. 20
AM tuning ..................................................... 31
Analog audio jack .......................................... 13
ANALOG MONITOR OUT,
Lipsync, Sound Setup ............................... 51
ANTENNA terminal, rear panel ...................... 5
Aspect, HDMI, Function Setup ..................... 52
AUDIO 1/2 jack, rear panel ............................. 5
Audio and video player connection ............... 16
Audio jack ..................................................... 13
AUDIO OUT jack, rear panel .......................... 5
Audio Output, HDMI, Function Setup .......... 51
Audio player connection ................................ 17
Auto Preset, Option menu ............................. 44
Auto Setup (YPAO), troubleshooting ........... 74
Auto Setup, Speaker Setup ............................ 48
Automatic setup ............................................. 21
AV 1-6 jack, rear panel .................................... 5
AV OUT jack, rear panel ................................. 5
■
B
BAND, front panel .......................................... 4
Bass Crossover Frequency,
Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ................... 50
BI AMP, advanced setup ............................... 63
Bi-amplification connection .......................... 12
Bluetooth component playback ..................... 37
Bluetooth wireless audio receiver
connection ................................................. 18
Bluetooth, troubleshooting ............................ 71
■
C
Cellar Club, sound field program .................. 28
Center Image, DSP Parameter ....................... 57
Center Level, DSP Parameter ........................ 57
Center speaker ............................................... 10
Center Speaker, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ........................................... 49
Center Width, DSP Parameter ....................... 57
Chamber, sound field program ...................... 28
Changing information on the front panel
display ....................................................... 26
CINEMA DSP 3D ......................................... 30
CINEMA DSP 3D indicator,
front panel display ...................................... 6
CINEMA DSP indicator,
front panel display ...................................... 6
Clear Preset, Option menu ............................. 44
COAXIAL jack .............................................. 13
CODE SET, remote control ............................. 7
COMPONENT VIDEO jack ......................... 13
Connect, Option menu ................................... 44
Connecting AM antenna ................................ 20
Connecting audio and video player ............... 16
Connecting audio player ................................ 17
Connecting Bluetooth wireless audio
receiver ..................................................... 18
Connecting external amplifier ....................... 18
Connecting external decoder ......................... 18
Connecting FM antenna ................................ 20
Connecting iPod universal dock .................... 18
Connecting multi-format player .................... 18
82 En
Connecting power cable .................................20
Connecting projector ......................................14
Connecting set-top box ..................................16
Connecting speaker ........................................11
Connecting speaker cable ...............................12
Connecting to network ...................................19
Connecting TV monitor .................................14
Connecting USB storage device ....................19
Connecting Zone2 ..........................................58
Connecting Zone3 ..........................................58
Connections ....................................................10
Controlling other component,
remote control ...........................................61
Controlling Zone2 ..........................................60
Controlling Zone3 ..........................................60
Cursor indicator, front panel display ................6
Cursor k / n / l / h, remote control ...........7
■
D
Decode Type, DSP Parameter ........................57
Decoder Mode, Option menu .........................43
Dialogue Lift, DSP Parameter .......................55
DIGITAL AUDIO jack, rear panel ..................5
Dimension, DSP Parameter ............................57
Dimmer, Display, Function Setup ..................52
Direct, DSP Parameter ...................................57
Disconnect, Option menu ...............................44
Display, Function Setup .................................52
DISPLAY, remote control ...............................7
Displaying Radio Data System
Information ................................................33
DOCK terminal, rear panel ..............................5
Drama, sound field program ..........................28
DSP Level, DSP Parameter ............................54
DSP Parameter, Setup menu ..........................54
Dynamic Range, Sound Setup .......................51
■
E
Effect Level, DSP Parameter .........................57
ENTER, remote control ...................................7
EON data service,
Radio Data System tuning .........................34
EON, Option menu ........................................44
EQ Type Select, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ............................................50
Equalizer, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup .......50
Extended Surround, Option menu ..................43
External amplifier connection ........................18
External component operation key,
remote control .............................................7
Extra Speaker Assignment,
Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ....................49
■
F
FM antenna connection ..................................20
FM Mode, Option menu .................................44
FM tuning .......................................................31
Frequency tuning ............................................31
Front left speaker ...........................................10
Front panel .......................................................4
Front panel display ...........................................6
Front Panel Display Scroll,
Display, Function Setup ............................52
Front panel display, front panel .......................4
Front Speaker, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ............................................49
Function Setup, Setup menu ..........................51
■
G
General, troubleshooting ................................65
GEQ, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ..............50
GUI Position, Display, Function Setup ..........52
■
H
Hall in Munich, sound field program .............28
Hall in Vienna, sound field program ..............28
HDMI 1-4 jack, rear panel ...............................5
HDMI control .................................................42
HDMI Control, HDMI, Function Setup ........ 51
HDMI indicator, front panel display ............... 6
HDMI information ......................................... 80
HDMI jack ..................................................... 13
HDMI OUT 1/2 jack, rear panel ...................... 5
HDMI OUT jack, select ................................. 42
HDMI OUT, remote control ............................ 7
HDMI OUT1, Lipsync, Sound Setup ............ 51
HDMI OUT2, Lipsync, Sound Setup ............ 51
HDMI THROUGH, front panel ....................... 4
HDMI, Function Setup .................................. 51
HDMI, troubleshooting ................................. 68
Headphones, use ............................................ 26
Hi-fi sound playback ..................................... 25
High frequency sound adjustment ................. 25
■
I
INFO, front panel ............................................ 4
INFO, remote control ...................................... 7
Information, Network, Function Setup .......... 54
INIT, advanced setup ..................................... 63
Initial Delay, DSP Parameter ......................... 55
Initial Volume, Volume, Function Setup ....... 53
Input Rename, Function Setup ...................... 53
Input selection key, remote control ................. 7
INPUT selector, front panel ............................. 4
Installing batteries, remote control .................. 6
Internal signal flow ........................................ 17
Internet Radio content playback .................... 41
IP Address, Network, Function Setup ........... 53
iPod playback ................................................ 35
iPod universal dock connection ..................... 18
iPod, troubleshooting ..................................... 70
■
L
LFE / Bass Out,
Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ................... 49
Lipsync, Sound Setup .................................... 51
Liveness, DSP Parameter .............................. 56
Low frequency sound adjustment .................. 25
■
M
MAC Address Filter,
Network, Function Setup .......................... 53
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF, front panel ................ 4
Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ........................ 48
Max Volume, Volume, Function Setup ......... 53
Memory Guard, Setup menu ......................... 57
MEMORY, front panel .................................... 4
MON.CHK, advanced setup .......................... 63
MONITOR OUT jack, rear panel .................... 5
Mono Movie, sound field program ................ 28
MULTI CH INPUT jack, rear panel ................ 5
Multi information display,
front panel display ...................................... 6
Multi-format player connection ..................... 18
Multi-zone configuration ............................... 58
Music Video, sound field program ................ 28
MUTE indicator, front panel display ............... 6
MUTE, remote control .................................... 7
Muting audio output ...................................... 25
■
N
Neo:6 Cinema, sound field program .............. 29
Neo:6 Music, sound field program ................ 29
NET FirmUpdate, advanced setup ................. 63
Network connection ....................................... 19
NETWORK port, rear panel ............................ 5
Network Standby, Network,
Function Setup .......................................... 54
Network, Function Setup ............................... 53
Network, trouble shooting ............................. 72
Numeric key, remote control ........................... 7
■
O
ON SCREEN, remote control .......................... 7
Operation range, remote control ...................... 6
OPTICAL jack ............................................... 13
Index
OPTIMIZER MIC jack, front panel .................4
Option menu ...................................................43
OPTION, remote control ..................................7
OUT 1/OUT 2 indicator,
front panel display .......................................6
P
S
Z
ZONE CONTROLS, front panel ..................... 4
Zone selection switch, remote control ............. 7
Zone, Function Setup .................................... 53
Zone2 connection .......................................... 58
Zone2 Initial Volume, Zone,
Function Setup .......................................... 53
Zone2 Max Volume, Zone,
Function Setup .......................................... 53
ZONE2 ON/OFF, front panel .......................... 4
ZONE2/3 OUT jack, rear panel ...................... 5
ZONE2/ZONE3 indicator,
front panel display ...................................... 6
Zone3 connection .......................................... 58
Zone3 Initial Volume, Zone,
Function Setup .......................................... 53
Zone3 Max Volume, Zone,
Function Setup .......................................... 53
ZONE3 ON/OFF, front panel .......................... 4
T
Test Tone, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ...... 50
The Bottom Line, sound field program ......... 28
The Roxy Theatre, sound field program ........ 28
Tone control ................................................... 25
TONE CONTROL, front panel ....................... 4
TRANSMIT, remote control ........................... 7
Transmitting remote control signal ................ 18
TRIGGER OUT 1/2 jack, rear panel ............... 5
Tuner (FM/AM), troubleshooting .................. 69
Tuner indicator, front panel display ................. 6
Tuner key, remote control ................................ 7
TUNING l / h ............................................. 4
Tuning, AM ................................................... 31
Tuning, FM .................................................... 31
Turning off ..................................................... 20
Turning on ..................................................... 20
TV control key, remote control ....................... 7
TV monitor connection .................................. 14
■
■
U
Unit, Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ............... 50
USB FirmUpdate, advanced setup ................. 63
“LMAIN ZONE ON/OFF” or
“dHDMI” (example) indicates
the name of the parts on the front
panel or the remote control. Refer
to “Part names and functions” on
page 4.
83 En
English
SCENE function .............................................24
SCENE IR, advanced setup ............................63
SCENE, front panel ..........................................4
SCENE, remote control ....................................7
Sci-Fi, sound field program ............................27
Selecting HDMI OUT jack ............................42
Selecting source on GUI screen .....................25
Selection SCENE ...........................................24
Setting remote control code ...........................61
Setting remote control ID ...............................64
Set-top box connection ...................................16
Setup menu .....................................................46
Y
YPAO ............................................................ 21
APPENDIX
■
■
■
ADVANCED
OPERATION
R
Radio Data System tuning ..............................33
Rear panel .........................................................5
Receiving remote control signal .....................18
Refresh, Option menu ....................................44
Remote control .................................................6
Remote control code resetting ........................61
Remote control code setting ...........................61
Remote control ID setting ..............................64
Remote control signal transmitter,
remote control .............................................7
Remote control, troubleshooting ....................70
REMOTE ID, advanced setup ........................63
REMOTE IN/OUT jack, rear panel .................5
Repeat, Option menu ......................................44
Replacing the battery,
simplified remote control ............................8
Resetting remote control code ........................61
Resolution, HDMI, Function Setup ...............52
RETURN, remote control ................................7
Reverb Delay, DSP Parameter .......................56
Reverb Level, DSP Parameter ........................57
Reverb Time, DSP Parameter ........................56
Roleplaying Game, sound field program .......28
Room Size, DSP Parameter ............................55
RS232C STBY, advanced setup ....................63
RS-232C terminal, rear panel ...........................5
V
VER, advanced setup .................................... 63
VIDEO AUX jack, front panel ........................ 4
VIDEO jack ................................................... 13
Video jack ..................................................... 13
Video Out, Option menu ............................... 45
Video/audio jack ........................................... 13
Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 30
VOLUME +/-, remote control ......................... 7
VOLUME control, front panel ........................ 4
VOLUME indicator, front panel display ......... 6
Volume Trim, Option menu .......................... 43
Volume, Function Setup ................................ 52
BASIC
OPERATION
■
■
PREPARATION
P. Initial Delay, DSP Parameter .....................55
P. Liveness, DSP Parameter ...........................56
P. Room Size, DSP Parameter .......................55
Pairing Bluetooth component .........................37
Pairing, Option menu .....................................45
Panorama, DSP Parameter .............................57
PC music content playback ............................39
PHONES jack, front panel ...............................4
PHONO jack, rear panel ..................................5
Placing speaker ...............................................10
PLII Game, sound field program ...................29
PLII Movie, sound field program ...................29
PLII Music, sound field program ...................29
PLIIx Game, sound field program .................29
PLIIx Movie, sound field program .................29
PLIIx Music, sound field program .................29
Power cable connection ..................................20
POWER, remote control ..................................7
PRE OUT jack, rear panel ................................5
Presence L Level, DSP Parameter .................57
Presence left speaker ......................................11
Presence R Level, DSP Parameter .................57
Presence right speaker ....................................11
PRESET l / h, front panel ............................4
Preset tuning ...................................................31
Pro Logic, sound field program .....................29
PROGRAM selector, front panel .....................4
Projector connection .......................................14
PTY Seek mode,
Radio Data System tuning .........................33
PTY Seek, Option menu ................................44
PURE DIRECT, front panel .............................4
USB port, front panel ...................................... 4
USB storage device connection ..................... 19
USB storage device playback ........................ 38
USB, troubleshooting .................................... 72
INTRODUCTION
■
Setup menu, basic operation .......................... 48
Shuffle, Option menu ..................................... 44
Signal Info, Option menu .............................. 44
SILENT CINEMA ......................................... 30
Simplified remote control ................................ 8
SLEEP indicator, front panel display .............. 6
Sleep timer ..................................................... 42
SLEEP, remote control .................................... 7
Sound field program ...................................... 27
Sound selection key, remote control ................ 7
Sound Setup, Setup menu .............................. 51
SOURCE POWER, remote control ................. 7
Source selection, GUI screen ......................... 25
SP IMP., advanced setup ............................... 63
Speaker cable connection .............................. 12
Speaker Configuration,
Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ................... 48
Speaker connection ........................................ 11
Speaker Distance, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ........................................... 50
Speaker indicator, front panel display ............. 6
Speaker layout ............................................... 10
Speaker Level, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ........................................... 50
Speaker placement ......................................... 10
Speaker Setup, Setup menu ........................... 48
SPEAKERS terminal, rear panel ..................... 5
Specifications ................................................. 81
Spectacle, sound field program ...................... 27
Sports, sound field program ........................... 28
Standard, sound field program ....................... 27
Standby Through, HDMI, Function Setup .... 51
Straight decode mode .................................... 30
Straight Enhancer, sound field program ........ 29
STRAIGHT, front panel .................................. 4
Sub-input selection key, remote control .......... 7
Subwoofer ...................................................... 10
Subwoofer Phase, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ........................................... 50
Sur. Back Initial Delay, DSP Parameter ........ 55
Sur. Back Liveness, DSP Parameter .............. 56
Sur. Back Room Size, DSP Parameter .......... 55
Sur. Initial Delay, DSP Parameter ................. 55
Sur. Liveness, DSP Parameter ....................... 56
Sur. Room Size, DSP Parameter .................... 55
Surround back left speaker ............................ 10
Surround Back Level, DSP Parameter ........... 57
Surround back right speaker .......................... 10
Surround back speaker ................................... 10
Surround Back Speaker,
Manual Setup, Speaker Setup ................... 49
Surround L Level, DSP Parameter ................ 57
Surround left speaker ..................................... 10
Surround R Level, DSP Parameter ................ 57
Surround right speaker ................................... 10
Surround Speaker, Manual Setup,
Speaker Setup ........................................... 49
Information about software
Information sur le logiciel
Information über Software
Information om programvara
Informatie over software
This product uses the following free software.
For information (copyright, etc) about each software, read the original sentences stated
below.
About curl
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2007, Daniel Stenberg, <daniel@haxx.se>.
All rights reserved.Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any
purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice
and this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS”, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
Copyright (c) 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999 Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan (Royal
Institute of Technology, Stockholm, Sweden).
Copyright (c) 2004 - 2007 Daniel Stenberg
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3 Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS
“AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
About lwip
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002 Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Leon Woestenberg <leon.woestenberg@gmx.net>
Copyright (c) 2001-2004 Axon Digital Design B.V., The Netherlands.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (c) 2002 CITEL Technologies Ltd. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3 Neither the name of CITEL Technologies Ltd nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
i
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY CITEL TECHNOLOGIES AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL CITEL TECHNOLOGIES OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (c) 2003 by Marc Boucher, Services Informatiques (MBSI) inc.
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998 by Global Election Systems Inc. All rights reserved.
Copyright (c) 2001 by Cognizant Pty Ltd.
The authors hereby grant permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and license this
software and its documentation for any purpose, provided that existing copyright notices
are retained in all copies and that this notice and the following disclaimer are included
verbatim in any distributions. No written agreement, license, or royalty fee is required
for any of the authorized uses.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Copyright (c) 1993, 1994 The Australian National University. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above
copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any
documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution
and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the Australian National
University. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Copyright (c) 1989 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above
copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any
documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution
and use acknowledge that the software was developed by Carnegie Mellon University.
The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Copyright (c) 1991 Gregory M. Christy. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above
copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any
documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution
and use acknowledge that the software was developed by Gregory M. Christy. The name
of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Copyright (c) 1995 Eric Rosenquist, Strata Software Limited. http://
www.strataware.com/ All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above
copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any
documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution
and use acknowledge that the software was developed by Eric Rosenquist. The name of
the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Copyright (C) 1990, RSA Data Security, Inc. All rights reserved.
License to copy and use this software is granted provided that it is identified as the
“RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm” in all material mentioning
or referencing this software or this function.
License is also granted to make and use derivative works provided that such works are
identified as “derived from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5 Message-Digest
Algorithm” in all material mentioning or referencing the derived work.
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no representations concerning either the merchantability
of this software or the suitability of this software for any particular purpose. It is
provided “AS IS” without express or implied warranty of any kind.
These notices must be retained in any copies of any part of this documentation and/or
software.
Copyright (c) 1989 Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms are permitted provided that the above
copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any
documentation, advertising materials, and other materials related to such distribution
and use acknowledge that the software was developed by the University of California,
Berkeley. The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
About OpenSSL
LICENSE ISSUES
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL
License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual
license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any
license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License
Copyright (c) 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the
following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)”
4 The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For
written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5 Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may
“OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL
Project.
6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the
OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, XEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Original SSLeay License
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following
conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this
distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL
documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not
to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given
attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a
textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with
the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the
following acknowledgement:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are
not cryptographic related :-).
4 If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps
directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of
this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under
another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
About FLAC codec library
Copyright (C) 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004 Josh Coalson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
– Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
– Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
– Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR CONTRIBUTORS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
About Vorbis library
Copyright (c) 2001, Xiphophorus
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
– Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
– Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
– Neither the name of the Xiphophorus nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND
CONTRIBUTORS “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Notice for Windows Media DRM
The Certified For Windows Vista logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries.
Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for
Windows Media contained in this device (WMDRM) to protect the integrity of
their content (Secure Content) so that their intellectual property, including
copyright, in such content is not misappropriated.
This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (WM-DRM
Software).
If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been compromised,
owners of Secure Content (Secure Content Owners) may request that Microsoft
revoke the WM-DRM Software s right to acquire new licenses to copy, display
and/or play Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WMDRM Software s
ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent
to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the
Internet or from a PC. Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also
download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.
ii
List of remote control codes
Liste des codes de boîtier de télécommande
Liste der Fernbedienungscodes
Lista över fjärrstyrningskoder
Lijst met afstandsbedieningscodes
TV
A.R. Systems
Acme
Acura
ADC
Admiral
0274
0260
0261, 0273
0259
0100, 0224, 0257,
0258, 0259, 0264,
0265
Advent
0204
Adventura
0107
Adyson
0260, 0327, 0328
Agashi
0327, 0328
Agazi
0259
Aiko
0260, 0261, 0273,
0274, 0327, 0328
Aim
0274
Aiwa
0028, 0297
Akai
0063, 0096, 0101,
0205, 0231, 0261,
0262, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0327,
0328
Akiba
0262, 0274
Akura
0259, 0262, 0273,
0274
Alaron
0327
Alba
0243, 0260, 0261,
0262, 0266, 0269,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0294, 0300, 0327
Albatron
0222
Alcyon
0249
Alleron
0105
Allorgan
0328
Allstar
0268, 0274
America Action 0225
AMOi
0326
Amplivision
0243, 0260, 0275,
0328
Amstrad
0259, 0261, 0262,
0273, 0274
Amtron
0104
Anam
0225, 0261
Anam National 0102, 0104
Anglo
0261, 0273
Anitech
0249, 0259, 0261,
0273, 0274
Ansonic
0243, 0250, 0261,
0263, 0273, 0274
AOC
0072, 0090, 0096,
0103
Apex
0061, 0117, 0139
Arcam
0327, 0328
Arcam Delta
0260
Aristona
0268, 0271, 0274
Arthur Martin 0275
ASA
0257, 0265
Asberg
0249, 0268, 0274
Astra
0261
Asuka
0259, 0260, 0262,
0327, 0328
Atlantic
0260, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0327
Atori
0261, 0273
iii
Auchan
Audiosonic
AudioTon
Audiovox
Ausind
Autovox
Aventura
Awa
Axion
Baird
Bang & Olufsen
Basic Line
Bastide
Baur
Bazin
Beko
Belcor
Bell & Howell
Benq
Beon
Best
Bestar
Binatone
Blue Sky
Blue Star
Boots
BPL
Bradford
Brandt
Brillian
Brinkmann
Brionvega
Britannia
Brockwood
Broksonic
Bruns
BTC
Bush
Candle
Capsonic
Carena
Carnivale
Carrefour
Carver
Cascade
Casio
Cathay
CCE
Celebrity
Celera
Centurion
0275
0243, 0260, 0261,
0262, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0328
0243, 0260, 0328
0104, 0144, 0225
0249
0249, 0257, 0259,
0260, 0328
0097
0327, 0328
0206
0328
0230, 0257
0261, 0262, 0268,
0273, 0274, 0328
0260, 0328
0271, 0274
0328
0243, 0269, 0274,
0282, 0351, 0357,
0372, 0380
0090
0065, 0100
0051, 0160, 0315
0268, 0271, 0274
0243
0243, 0268, 0274
0260, 0328
0262, 0274
0270
0260, 0328
0270, 0274
0104, 0225
0267, 0272
0228
0274
0257, 0268, 0271,
0274
0260, 0327, 0328
0090
0063, 0225
0257
0262
0261, 0262, 0264,
0266, 0268, 0270,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0282, 0286, 0294,
0300, 0328, 0329,
0351, 0388, 0394,
0413
0072, 0090, 0096,
0107
0259
0274
0096
0266
0088
0261, 0273, 0274
0317
0268, 0271, 0274
0229, 0328
0057, 0101
0117
0268, 0271, 0274
Century
CGE
Changhong
Chimei
Cimline
Citizen
0257
0243, 0249
0117
0323
0261, 0273
0072, 0085, 0090,
0096, 0104
City
0261, 0273
Clarion
0225
Clarivox
0271
Clatronic
0243, 0249, 0259,
0260, 0261, 0262,
0268, 0269, 0273,
0274, 0328
CMS
0327
CMS Hightec 0328
Coby
0151
Colortyme
0072, 0090
Commercial Solutions
0071
Concerto
0072, 0090
Concorde
0261, 0273
Condor
0243, 0260, 0268,
0269, 0273, 0274,
0327
Contec
0225, 0260, 0261,
0266, 0273, 0327
Contec/Cony 0094, 0104
Continental Edison
0267
Cosmel
0261, 0273
Craig
0104, 0225
Crosley
0088, 0119, 0249,
0257
Crown
0104, 0225, 0243,
0249, 0261, 0268,
0269, 0271, 0273,
0274
CS Electronics 0260, 0262, 0327
CTC Clatronic 0263
CTX
0159
Curtis Mathes 0065, 0071, 0072,
0085, 0088, 0090,
0096, 0099, 0224
CXC
0104, 0225
Cybertron
0262
Cytron
0202
Daewoo
0072, 0085, 0090,
0103, 0119, 0245,
0260, 0261, 0268,
0273, 0274, 0281,
0285, 0303, 0321,
0327, 0328, 0344,
0361, 0387
Dainichi
0262, 0327
Dansai
0259, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0327, 0328
Dantax
0243, 0271
Dawa
0274
Daytron
0072, 0085, 0090,
0261, 0273
De Graaf
0264
Decca
0260, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0328
Dell
0167, 0195
Denver
Desmet
Diamant
Diamond
DiamondVision
Dimensia
Disney
Dixi
0308, 0312
0268, 0271, 0274
0274
0327
0213, 0221
0099
0137
0261, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0328
Dream Vision 0415, 0416
DTS
0261, 0273
Dual
0260, 0274, 0328
Dual-Tec
0260, 0261
Dumont
0076, 0090, 0108,
0257, 0260, 0263,
0328
Durabrand
0077, 0097, 0133,
0225
Dux
0271
Dwin
0224
Dynatron
0268, 0271, 0274
Dynex
0181, 0182
Elbe
0243, 0250, 0274,
0328
Elcit
0257
Electa
0270
ELECTRO TECH 0261
Electroband
0057, 0101
Electrograph
0226
Electrohome
0072, 0090, 0101,
0102
Element
0180
Elin
0260, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0327
Elite
0262, 0268, 0274
Elman
0263
Elta
0261, 0273, 0327
Emerson
0065, 0072, 0077,
0082, 0085, 0090,
0094, 0095, 0097,
0104, 0105, 0119,
0225, 0243, 0257,
0274
Emprex
0200
Envision
0072, 0090, 0096
Epson
0156, 0201, 0309
Erres
0268, 0271, 0274
ESA
0097
ESC
0328
Etron
0261
Eurofeel
0328
Euro-Feel
0259
Euroline
0271
Euroman
0243, 0327, 0328
Euromann
0259, 0260, 0268,
0274
Europhon
0260, 0263, 0268,
0274, 0327, 0328
Expert
0275
Exquisit
0274
Fenner
0261, 0273
Ferguson
0267, 0271, 0272
Fidelity
0260, 0264, 0274,
0327
Filsai
0328
Finlandia
Finlux
0264
0249, 0257, 0260,
0263, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0328
FIRST LINE 0260, 0261, 0268
Firstline
0273, 0274, 0327,
0328
Fisher
0065, 0243, 0257,
0260, 0266, 0269,
0328
Flint
0268, 0274
Formenti
0249, 0257, 0258,
0260, 0271, 0327
Formenti/Phoenix 0327
Fortress
0257, 0258
Fraba
0243, 0274
Friac
0243
Frontech
0259, 0261, 0264,
0265, 0273, 0328
Fujitsu
0023, 0024, 0025,
0105, 0328
Fujitsu General 0328
Fujitsu Siemens 0425, 0426, 0427,
0428, 0429
Funai
0033, 0034, 0035,
0036, 0037, 0097,
0104, 0105, 0225,
0259
Futuretech
0104, 0225
Galaxi
0269, 0274
Galaxis
0243, 0274
Gateway
0163, 0226, 0227
GBC
0261, 0266, 0273
GE
0069, 0071, 0072,
0073, 0077, 0090,
0099, 0102, 0106,
0112, 0131
Geant Casino 0275
GEC
0260, 0265, 0268,
0271, 0274, 0328
Geloso
0261, 0264, 0273
General Technic 0261, 0273
Genexxa
0262, 0265, 0268,
0274
GFM
0177, 0210
Giant
0328
Gibralter
0076, 0090, 0096,
0108
GoldHand
0327
Goldline
0274
GoldStar
0072, 0077, 0085,
0090, 0094, 0096,
0103, 0243, 0260,
0261, 0264, 0268,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0327, 0328
Goodmans
0164, 0259, 0261,
0266, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0322,
0328, 0395, 0399,
0412
Gorenje
0243, 0269
GPM
0262
GPX
0211
Gradiente
0162
Graetz
0265
Granada
0249, 0260, 0264,
0266, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0275, 0328
Grandin
0261, 0262, 0270,
0271
Gronic
0328
Grundig
0242, 0243, 0249,
0274, 0356
Grunpy
0104, 0105, 0225
Haier
Halifax
Hallmark
Hampton
Hanseatic
Hantarex
Hantor
Harman/Kardon
Harvard
Harwood
Havermy
HCM
Hema
Hewlett Packard
Higashi
HiLine
Hinari
Hisawa
Hisense
Hitachi
Hornyphon
Hoshai
Huanyu
Hygashi
Hyper
Hypson
Hyundai
Iberia
ICE
ICeS
Ilo
IMA
Imperial
Indiana
Infinity
InFocus
Ingelen
Ingersol
Initial
Inno Hit
Innovation
Insignia
Inteq
Interactive
Interbuy
Interfunk
International
0187, 0207
0259, 0260, 0327,
0328
0072, 0077, 0090
0260, 0327, 0328
0243, 0250, 0260,
0261, 0266, 0268,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0328
0261, 0273, 0274
0274
0088
0104, 0225
0273, 0274
0224
0259, 0260, 0261,
0270, 0273, 0274,
0328
0273, 0328
0146
0327
0274
0261, 0262, 0266,
0268, 0271, 0273,
0274
0262, 0270, 0275
0165
0006, 0014, 0015,
0016, 0042, 0072,
0090, 0094, 0173,
0254, 0255, 0256,
0260, 0264, 0265,
0266, 0274, 0285,
0300, 0319, 0328,
0348, 0349, 0385,
0402, 0410
0268, 0274
0262
0260, 0327
0260, 0327, 0328
0260, 0261, 0273,
0327, 0328
0259, 0260, 0268,
0270, 0271, 0274,
0275, 0328
0223
0274
0259, 0260, 0261,
0262, 0268, 0273,
0274, 0327, 0328
0327
0198, 0203
0104
0243, 0249, 0265,
0268, 0269, 0274
0268, 0271, 0274
0088
0168, 0277, 0313,
0397, 0430
0265
0261, 0273
0203
0249, 0260, 0261,
0262, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0328
0259, 0261
0182, 0188, 0190,
0209
0076
0243
0261, 0273
0243, 0257, 0265,
0268, 0271, 0274
0327
Intervision
Irradio
Isukai
ITC
ITS
ITT
ITV
Janeil
JBL
JC Penney
JCB
Jensen
JVC
Kaisui
Kamosonic
Kamp
Kapsch
Karcher
Kawasho
KEC
Kendo
Kenwood
KIC
Kingsley
KLH
Kloss Novabeam
Kneissel
Kolster
Konka
Korpel
Korting
Kosmos
Koyoda
KTV
Kyoto
Lasat
Lenco
Lenoir
Leyco
LG
LG/GoldStar
Liesenk
Liesenkotter
Life
Lifetec
Lloyds
0243, 0259, 0260,
0263, 0274, 0328
0249, 0261, 0262,
0268, 0271, 0273,
0274
0262, 0274
0260, 0328
0262, 0268, 0270,
0274, 0327
0261, 0265
0261, 0271, 0274
0107
0088
0072, 0073, 0085,
0090, 0099, 0103,
0106
0057, 0101
0072, 0090
0017, 0018, 0019,
0092, 0093, 0094,
0106, 0251, 0252,
0266, 0268, 0293,
0360, 0379
0260, 0261, 0262,
0270, 0273, 0274,
0327, 0328
0260
0260, 0327
0265
0243, 0260, 0261,
0271, 0274
0072, 0090, 0101,
0327
0225
0243, 0263, 0264,
0274
0072, 0090, 0096
0328
0260, 0327
0117
0104, 0107
0243, 0250, 0274
0268, 0274
0262
0268, 0271, 0274
0243, 0257
0274
0261
0085, 0096, 0104,
0225, 0229, 0260,
0328
0327, 0328
0243
0261, 0273
0260, 0261, 0273
0259, 0268, 0271,
0274
0016, 0038, 0039,
0077, 0103, 0145,
0222, 0243, 0246,
0253, 0260, 0261,
0264, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0282,
0290, 0299, 0316,
0327, 0328, 0351,
0359, 0367, 0382,
0384, 0389, 0396
0246
0271
0274
0259, 0261
0259, 0261, 0273,
0274
0273
Loewe
Loewe Opta
Logik
Luma
Lumatron
Lux May
Luxman
Luxor
LXI
M Electronic
MAG
Magnadyne
Magnafon
Magnavox
Magnum
Majestic
Mandor
Manesth
Marantz
Marelli
Mark
Masuda
Matsui
Matsushita
Maxent
Mediator
Medion
Megapower
Megatron
MElectronic
Melvox
Memorex
Memphis
Mercury
Metz
MGA
Micromaxx
Microstar
Midland
Minerva
Minoka
Mintek
Mitsubishi
Mivar
Monivision
0243, 0250, 0274,
0280, 0306, 0347
0257, 0268, 0271
0100
0264, 0271, 0273,
0274
0264, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0328
0268
0072, 0090
0260, 0264, 0328
0061, 0065, 0071,
0072, 0073, 0077,
0088, 0099
0260, 0261, 0265,
0267, 0268, 0271
0050
0257, 0263, 0271
0249, 0260, 0263,
0327
0072, 0088, 0090,
0091, 0095, 0096,
0098, 0114, 0115,
0129, 0134, 0176,
0178, 0189, 0210
0259, 0261
0100
0259
0259, 0260, 0268,
0271, 0274, 0328
0072, 0088, 0090,
0096, 0158, 0268,
0271, 0274
0257
0268, 0271, 0273,
0274, 0327, 0328
0328
0260, 0261, 0264,
0266, 0268, 0271,
0273, 0274, 0328,
0405
0067
0193, 0226
0268, 0271, 0274
0259, 0261, 0274
0222
0072, 0077
0273, 0274, 0327,
0328
0275
0065, 0072, 0077,
0100, 0103, 0133,
0219, 0261, 0273
0261, 0273
0273, 0274
0257
0072, 0077, 0090,
0096, 0103
0259, 0261
0259, 0261
0069, 0071, 0073,
0076, 0085, 0106,
0108
0249
0268, 0274
0203
0006, 0015, 0016,
0048, 0072, 0077,
0090, 0103, 0196,
0224, 0257, 0266,
0268, 0274, 0298,
0371
0243, 0249, 0250,
0260, 0327, 0328
0222
iv
Montgomery Ward
0100
Motion
0249
Motorola
0102, 0224
MTC
0072, 0090, 0096,
0103, 0243, 0327
Multi System 0271
Multitech
0104, 0225, 0229,
0243, 0260, 0261,
0263, 0264, 0266,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0327, 0328
Murphy
0260, 0327
NAD
0061, 0072, 0077
Naonis
0264
NEC
0026, 0053, 0072,
0090, 0096, 0102,
0103, 0266, 0328
Neckermann
0243, 0257, 0260,
0264, 0268, 0269,
0271, 0274, 0328
NEI
0268, 0271, 0274
Net-TV
0226
Neufunk
0273, 0274
New Tech
0261, 0268
New World
0262
NewTech
0273, 0274, 0328
Nicamagic
0260, 0327
Nikkai
0259, 0260, 0262,
0268, 0271, 0273,
0274, 0327, 0328
Nikko
0072, 0077, 0096
Nobliko
0249, 0260, 0263,
0327
Nokia
0265
Norcent
0155
Nordic
0328
Nordmende
0257, 0265, 0267,
0268
Nordvision
0271
Novatronic
0274
Oceanic
0265, 0275
Okano
0243, 0269, 0274
Olevia
0052, 0140, 0149,
0154, 0157
ONCEAS
0260
Onwa
0104, 0225
Opera
0274
Oppo
0208
Optimus
0065, 0067
Optoma
0194
Optonica
0224
Orbit
0268, 0274
Orion
0121, 0192, 0261,
0268, 0271, 0273,
0274, 0282, 0329
Orline
0274
Osaki
0259, 0260, 0262,
0274, 0328
Oso
0262
Otto Versand 0258, 0260, 0266,
0268, 0270, 0271,
0274, 0328
Pael
0260, 0327
Palladium
0243, 0260, 0269,
0274, 0328
Palsonic
0328
Panama
0259, 0260, 0261,
0273, 0274, 0327,
0328
Panasonic
0006, 0007, 0066,
0067, 0068, 0069,
0070, 0102, 0106,
0113, 0147, 0215,
v
0241, 0265, 0274,
0279, 0310, 0332,
0334, 0368, 0374
Panavision
0274
Pathe Cinema 0243, 0250, 0260,
0275, 0327
Pausa
0261, 0273
Penney
0061, 0069, 0071,
0077, 0096
Perdio
0274, 0327
Perfekt
0274
Philco
0072, 0088, 0090,
0091, 0094, 0096,
0102, 0103, 0243,
0249, 0257, 0274
Philharmonic 0260, 0328
Philips
0040, 0088, 0089,
0090, 0091, 0094,
0098, 0099, 0102,
0114, 0135, 0143,
0176, 0178, 0189,
0210, 0212, 0232,
0233, 0257, 0260,
0268, 0271, 0274,
0278, 0287, 0301,
0302, 0307, 0311,
0314, 0330, 0331,
0333, 0337, 0338,
0339, 0341, 0343,
0345, 0355, 0363,
0365, 0377, 0378,
0381, 0383, 0406,
0409, 0414
Philips Magnavox 0089, 0114, 0115
Phoenix
0243, 0257, 0268,
0271, 0274, 0327
Phonola
0257, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0327
Pilot
0085, 0090, 0096
Pioneer
0012, 0013, 0072,
0090, 0243, 0265,
0267, 0268, 0271,
0274, 0408
Plantron
0259, 0268, 0273,
0274
Playsonic
0328
Polaroid
0117, 0152, 0184,
0220
Poppy
0261, 0273
Portland
0072, 0085, 0090,
0103
Prandoni-Prince
0249, 0264
Precision
0260, 0328
Prima
0161, 0207, 0261,
0265, 0273
Princeton
0222
Prism
0069, 0106
Profex
0261, 0273
Profi-Tronic
0268, 0274
Proline
0268, 0274
Proscan
0071, 0073, 0099
Prosonic
0243, 0260, 0271,
0274, 0327, 0328
Protech
0259, 0260, 0261,
0263, 0268, 0271,
0328
Proton
0072, 0077, 0090,
0094
Protron
0150
PROVIEW
0050, 0164
Provision
0271, 0274
Pulsar
0076, 0090, 0108
Pye
0268, 0271, 0274,
0296, 0338
Pymi
0261, 0273
Quandra Vision
Quasar
0275
0067, 0069, 0102,
0106
Quelle
0259, 0260, 0268,
0271, 0274, 0328
Questa
0266
Radialva
0274
RadioShack
0065, 0071, 0077,
0096, 0225, 0274
RadioShack/Realistic
0072, 0085, 0090,
0094, 0099, 0104
Radiola
0268, 0271, 0274,
0328
Radiomarelli
0257, 0274
Radiotone
0243, 0268, 0273,
0274
Rank
0266
RCA
0071, 0072, 0073,
0074, 0075, 0090,
0099, 0102, 0103,
0109, 0120, 0179,
0218
Realistic
0065, 0077, 0096,
0225
Recor
0274
Redstar
0274
Reflex
0274
Revox
0243, 0268, 0271,
0274
Rex
0259, 0264, 0265
RFT
0243, 0250, 0257
Rhapsody
0327
R-Line
0268, 0271, 0274
Roadstar
0259, 0261, 0262,
0273
Robotron
0257
Rowa
0327, 0328
Royal Lux
0243
RTF
0257
Runco
0076, 0096, 0108
Saba
0257, 0265, 0267,
0272, 0376
Saisho
0259, 0260, 0261,
0273, 0328
Salora
0264, 0265
Sambers
0249, 0263
Sampo
0072, 0085, 0090,
0096, 0226
Samsung
0029, 0030, 0031,
0032, 0044, 0045,
0046, 0047, 0072,
0077, 0084, 0085,
0086, 0087, 0090,
0094, 0096, 0103,
0118, 0217, 0229,
0235, 0236, 0237,
0243, 0259, 0260,
0261, 0268, 0269,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0284, 0295, 0327,
0328, 0336, 0346,
0390, 0407
Sandra
0260, 0327, 0328
Sansui
0063, 0121, 0268,
0274
Sanyo
0020, 0021, 0022,
0049, 0065, 0090,
0141, 0191, 0243,
0250, 0260, 0266,
0273, 0291, 0327,
0328, 0370, 0373,
0391
SBR
0271, 0274
Sceptre
0166, 0185
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
Scotch
Scott
Sears
SEG
SEI
SEI-Sinudyne
Seleco
Sencora
Sentra
Serino
Sharp
Sheng Chia
Shogun
Siarem
Sierra
Siesta
Signature
Silva
Silver
Singer
Sinudyne
Skantic
Solavox
Sonitron
Sonoko
Sonolor
Sontec
Sony
Sound & Vision
Soundesign
Soundwave
Squareview
SSS
Standard
Starlite
Stenway
0265
0260, 0262, 0268,
0271, 0274, 0287,
0300, 0328, 0364,
0366
0072, 0077
0072, 0077, 0090,
0094, 0104, 0105,
0199, 0225
0061, 0065, 0071,
0072, 0073, 0077,
0088, 0090, 0097,
0099, 0105
0259, 0260, 0263,
0266, 0271, 0273,
0274, 0300, 0327,
0328
0274
0257, 0263, 0265
0264, 0265, 0266
0261, 0273
0273
0327
0009, 0010, 0011,
0072, 0080, 0081,
0082, 0083, 0085,
0090, 0094, 0110,
0148, 0183, 0216,
0224, 0247, 0248,
0258, 0266, 0288,
0304, 0324, 0325,
0340, 0358, 0362,
0369, 0386, 0392,
0398, 0400, 0401,
0403
0224
0090
0257, 0263, 0274
0268, 0274
0243
0100
0327
0266
0257, 0263, 0275
0257, 0263, 0271,
0274
0265
0265
0243, 0328
0259, 0260, 0261,
0268, 0271, 0273,
0274, 0328
0265, 0275
0243, 0268, 0271,
0274
0041, 0057, 0058,
0059, 0060, 0101,
0116, 0125, 0126,
0127, 0142, 0169,
0170, 0171, 0172,
0174, 0234, 0261,
0266, 0276, 0289,
0292, 0393, 0411
0262, 0263
0072, 0077, 0090,
0104, 0105, 0225
0268, 0271, 0274
0097
0090, 0104, 0225
0260, 0261, 0262,
0268, 0273, 0274,
0328
0104, 0225, 0271,
0273, 0274
0270
Stern
Strato
Stylandia
Sunkai
Sunstar
Sunwood
Superla
Superscan
SuperTech
Supra
Supre-Macy
Supreme
Susumu
Sutron
SVA
Sydney
Sylvania
Symphonic
Syntax
Syntax-Brillian
Sysline
Sytong
Tandy
Tashiko
Tatung
TCM
Teac
Tec
Technics
TechniSat
Techwood
TEDELEX
Teknika
Teleavia
Telecor
Telefunken
Telegazi
Telemeister
Telesonic
Telestar
Teletech
Teleton
Televideon
Televiso
Tensai
Tesmet
Tevion
Texet
Thomson
Thorn
TMK
TNCi
Tokai
Tokyo
0264, 0265
0273, 0274
0328
0261
0273, 0274
0261, 0268, 0273,
0274
0260, 0327, 0328
0095, 0224
0273, 0274, 0327
0261, 0273
0107
0057, 0101
0262
0261, 0273
0197
0260, 0327, 0328
0072, 0088, 0089,
0090, 0091, 0095,
0096, 0097, 0098,
0175, 0177, 0210
0097, 0104, 0108,
0133, 0210, 0225
0149
0149
0271
0327
0224, 0258, 0260,
0262, 0265, 0328
0260, 0264, 0266,
0327, 0328
0102, 0227, 0260,
0268, 0271, 0274,
0328
0259, 0261
0274, 0328
0260, 0261, 0273,
0328
0067, 0069, 0106
0320, 0417, 0418,
0419
0069, 0072, 0090,
0106
0328
0072, 0085, 0088,
0090, 0094, 0100,
0103, 0104, 0105,
0225
0267
0274, 0328
0267, 0268, 0272,
0274
0274
0274
0274
0274
0261, 0271, 0273,
0274
0260, 0328
0327
0275
0261, 0262, 0268,
0273, 0274, 0328
0268
0259, 0261
0260, 0273, 0327,
0328
0238, 0239, 0240,
0260, 0267, 0268,
0272, 0274, 0335
0271, 0274
0072, 0077, 0090
0076
0268, 0274, 0328
0260, 0327
Tomashi
Toshiba
0270
0027, 0043, 0053,
0054, 0061, 0062,
0063, 0064, 0065,
0122, 0123, 0124,
0128, 0130, 0132,
0139, 0214, 0244,
0266, 0283, 0305,
0328, 0329, 0342,
0350, 0352, 0353,
0354, 0375, 0404
Totevision
0085
Towada
0265, 0328
Trakton
0328
Trans Continens
0274, 0328
Transtec
0327
Trident
0328
Triumph
0274
Uher
0243, 0249, 0265,
0268, 0274
Ultravox
0257, 0260, 0263,
0274, 0327
Unic Line
0274
United
0271
Universum
0243, 0249, 0259,
0268, 0269, 0271,
0274, 0328
Univox
0274
Vector Research
0096
Vestel
0264, 0265, 0268,
0269, 0271, 0274,
0328
Vexa
0261, 0271, 0273,
0274
Victor
0093, 0266, 0268
VIDEOLOGIC 0327
Videologique 0260, 0262, 0327,
0328
VideoSystem 0268, 0274
Videotechnic 0327, 0328
Vidikron
0088
Vidtech
0072, 0077, 0090,
0103
Viewsonic
0153, 0186, 0226,
0318
Viking
0107
Viore
0198
Visiola
0260, 0327
Vision
0268, 0274, 0328
Vizio
0090, 0136, 0160,
0227, 0420, 0421,
0422, 0423, 0424
Vortec
0268, 0271, 0274
Voxson
0249, 0257, 0264,
0265, 0268, 0274
Waltham
0260, 0274, 0328
Wards
0072, 0077, 0088,
0090, 0091, 0096,
0098, 0099, 0100,
0103, 0105
Watson
0268, 0271, 0274
Watt Radio
0260, 0263, 0327
Waycon
0061
Wega
0257, 0266, 0274
Wegavox
0273
Weltblick
0268, 0271, 0274,
0328
Westinghouse 0057, 0138, 0142
White Westinghouse
0008, 0119, 0260,
0263, 0271, 0274,
0327
Wincom
0055, 0056
Xrypton
0274
Yamaha
Yamishi
Yokan
Yoko
Yorx
Zanussi
Zenith
0000, 0001, 0002,
0003, 0004, 0005,
0072, 0090, 0096,
0103
0274, 0328
0274
0243, 0259, 0260,
0261, 0262, 0268,
0271, 0273, 0274,
0327, 0328
0262
0264, 0328
0076, 0077, 0078,
0079, 0090, 0100,
0108, 0111
VCR
ABS
Adventura
Adyson
Aiwa
1066
1023
1090
1023, 1072, 1073,
1074
Akai
1071, 1073
Akiba
1079, 1090
Akura
1073, 1079, 1090
Alba
1074, 1075, 1076,
1079, 1090, 1091
Alienware
1066
Ambassador
1076
American High 1022
Amstrad
1072, 1090, 1091
Anitech
1079, 1090
Apex
1010
ASA
1077, 1078
Asha
1020
Asuka
1072, 1077, 1078,
1079, 1090
Audio Dynamics 1018
Audiosonic
1091
Audiovox
1021
Baird
1072, 1073, 1075,
1091
Bang & Olufsen 1067
Basic Line
1074, 1075, 1076,
1079, 1090, 1091
Baur
1078
Beaumark
1020
Bell & Howell 1019
Bestar
1075, 1076, 1091
Black Panther Line
1075, 1091
Blaupunkt
1078
Bondstec
1076, 1090
Broksonic
1054
Bush
1074, 1075, 1079,
1090, 1091, 1097,
1099, 1109, 1139
Calix
1021
Candle
1020, 1021
Canon
1022
Cathay
1091
Catron
1076
CGE
1072, 1073
Cimline
1074, 1079, 1090
CineVision
1058
Citizen
1020, 1021
Clatronic
1076, 1090
Colortyme
1018
Condor
1075, 1076, 1091
Craig
1020, 1021
Crown
1075, 1076, 1079,
1090, 1091
Curtis Mathes 1018, 1020, 1022
Cybernex
1020
CyberPower
1066
Daewoo
1023, 1075, 1076,
1091, 1116, 1141
Dansai
1079, 1090, 1091
Dantax
1074
Daytron
1075, 1091
DBX
1018
De Graaf
1078
Decca
1072, 1073, 1078
Dell
1066
Denko
1090
DiamondVision 1050
DigiFusion
1092
DIRECTV
1035, 1038, 1040,
1059, 1060, 1061,
1065
Dish Network 1064
Dishpro
1064
Dual
1073, 1078, 1091
Dumont
1072, 1078
Durabrand
1032
Dynatech
1023
Echostar
1064
Elbe
1091
Elcatech
1090
Electrohome
1021
Electrophonic 1021
Elsay
1090
Elta
1079, 1090, 1091
Emerson
1021, 1022, 1023,
1070, 1090
ESC
1075, 1091
Etzuko
1079, 1090
Expressvu
1064
Ferguson
1073
Fidelity
1072, 1090
Finlandia
1078
Finlux
1072, 1073, 1078
Firstline
1074, 1077, 1079,
1090
Fisher
1019
Flint
1074
Formenti/Phoenix 1078
Frontech
1076
Fuji
1022
Fujitsu
1072
Funai
1023, 1072
Galaxy
1072
Garrard
1023
Gateway
1066
GBC
1076, 1079
GE
1020, 1022
GEC
1078
Geloso
1079
General
1076
General Technic 1074
GOI
1064
GoldHand
1079, 1090
Goldstar
1018, 1021, 1072,
1077
Goodmans
1072, 1075, 1076,
1077, 1079, 1090,
1091
Gradiente
1023
Graetz
1073
Granada
1078
Grandin
1072, 1075, 1076,
1077, 1079, 1090,
1091
Grundig
1078, 1079
Hanseatic
1077, 1078, 1091
Harley Davidson 1023
Harman/Kardon
1018
Harwood
1090
HCM
1079, 1090
Headquarter
1019
vi
Hewlett Packard
Hinari
1066
1074, 1079, 1090,
1091
Hisawa
1074
Hitachi
1072, 1073, 1078,
1089, 1108, 1124
HNS
1060
Howard Computers
1066
HP
1066
HTS
1064
Hughes
1035, 1040, 1061
Hughes Network Systems
1038, 1060
Humax
1035, 1060, 1094
Hush
1066
Hypson
1074, 1079, 1090,
1091
iBUYPOWER 1066
Impego
1076
Imperial
1072
Inno Hit
1075, 1076, 1078,
1079, 1090, 1091
Innovation
1074
Instant Replay 1022
Interbuy
1077, 1090
Interfunk
1078
Intervision
1072, 1091
Irradio
1077, 1079, 1090
ITT
1073
ITV
1075, 1077, 1091
JC Penney
1018, 1019, 1020,
1021, 1022
JCL
1022
JVC
1011, 1012, 1013,
1014, 1015, 1016,
1017, 1018, 1019,
1028, 1035, 1064,
1073, 1085, 1117,
1130, 1131, 1133,
1134, 1135, 1136
Kaisui
1079, 1090
Karcher
1078
Kendo
1074, 1075, 1076,
1090
Kenwood
1018, 1019, 1073
Kodak
1021, 1022
Korpel
1079, 1090
Kyoto
1090
Lenco
1075
Leyco
1079, 1090
LG
1021, 1053, 1072,
1077, 1088, 1100,
1106, 1125, 1143
Lifetec
1074
Linksys
1066
Lloyd’s
1023
Loewe Opta
1077, 1078
Logik
1079, 1090
Lumatron
1075, 1091
Luxor
1090
LXI
1021
M Electronic 1072
Magnavox
1022, 1032, 1044,
1070
Magnin
1021
Manesth
1079, 1090
Marantz
1018, 1019, 1022,
1078
Mark
1091
Marta
1021
Matsui
1074, 1077
Matsushita
1022
Media Center PC 1066
Mediator
1078
vii
Medion
MEI
Memorex
1074
1022
1019, 1020, 1021,
1022, 1023, 1032,
1048, 1069, 1072,
1077
Memphis
1079, 1090
MGN Technology 1020
Micromaxx
1074
Microsoft
1066
Microstar
1074
Migros
1072
Mind
1066
Mitsubishi
1029, 1072, 1078
Motorola
1022
MTC
1020
Multitech
1020, 1023, 1072,
1076, 1078, 1079,
1090
Murphy
1072
NEC
1018, 1019, 1073
Neckermann
1073, 1078
NEI
1078
Nesco
1079, 1090
Nikkai
1076, 1090, 1091
Nikko
1021
Niveus Media 1066
Noblex
1020
Nokia
1073, 1091
Nordmende
1073
Northgate
1066
Oceanic
1072, 1073
Okano
1074, 1090, 1091
Olympus
1022
Optimus
1021
Orion
1033, 1069, 1074,
1097, 1139
Orson
1072
Osaki
1072, 1077, 1079,
1090
Otto Versand 1078
Palladium
1073, 1077, 1079,
1090
Panasonic
1007, 1008, 1009,
1022, 1026, 1042,
1043, 1068, 1082,
1101, 1126, 1132
Pathe Marconi 1073
Perdio
1072
Philco
1022, 1090
Philips
1022, 1030, 1035,
1038, 1039, 1040,
1044, 1055, 1060,
1078, 1084, 1095,
1096, 1104, 1105,
1111, 1113, 1122,
1124, 1127, 1128,
1129
Philips Magnavox 1030
Phonola
1078
Pilot
1021
Pioneer
1078, 1118
Polaroid
1010, 1049
Portland
1075, 1076, 1091
Prinz
1072
Profex
1079
Proline
1072
Proscan
1065
Prosonic
1074, 1091
Pulsar
1032
Pye
1052, 1078
Quarter
1019
Quartz
1019
Quasar
1022
Quelle
1072, 1078
Radialva
1090
RadioShack
1021
RadioShack/Realistic
1019, 1020, 1021,
1022, 1023
Radiola
1078
Radix
1021
Randex
1021
RCA
1020, 1022, 1025,
1035, 1040, 1047,
1060, 1065
Realistic
1019, 1020, 1021,
1022, 1023
ReplayTV
1041, 1068
Rex
1073
RFT
1076, 1078, 1090
Ricavision
1066
Roadstar
1075, 1077, 1079,
1090, 1091
Royal
1090
Runco
1032
Saba
1073
Saisho
1074, 1079
Samsung
1006, 1020, 1038,
1040, 1046, 1060,
1080, 1107, 1110,
1112, 1121, 1123,
1140, 1142
Samurai
1076, 1090
Sanky
1032
Sansui
1033, 1056, 1069,
1073
Sanyo
1019, 1020, 1114
Saville
1091
SBR
1078
Schaub Lorenz 1072, 1073
Schneider
1072, 1074, 1075,
1076, 1077, 1078,
1079, 1090, 1091
Sears
1019, 1021, 1022
SEG
1079, 1090, 1091
SEI-Sinudyne 1078
Seleco
1073
Sentra
1076, 1090
Sentron
1079, 1090
Sharp
1031, 1045, 1057,
1081, 1115, 1137
Shintom
1079, 1090
Shivaki
1077
Shogun
1020
Siemens
1077
Silva
1077
Silver
1091
Singer
1022
Sinudyne
1078
Solavox
1076
Sonic Blue
1041, 1068
Sonneclair
1090
Sonoko
1075, 1091
Sontec
1077
Sony
1000, 1001, 1002,
1003, 1024, 1027,
1036, 1062, 1066,
1083, 1098, 1103,
1138
Stack
1066
Stack 9
1066
Standard
1075, 1091
Stern
1091
STS
1022
Sunkai
1074
Sunstar
1072
Suntronic
1072
Sunwood
1079, 1090
Superscan
1070
Sylvania
1022, 1023, 1044,
1052, 1070
Symphonic
1023, 1044, 1090
Systemax
1066
Tagar Systems 1066
Taisho
1074
Tandberg
1091
Tandy
1019
Tashiko
1021, 1072
Tatung
1072, 1073, 1078
TCM
1074, 1093, 1120
Teac
1023, 1091
Tec
1076, 1090, 1091
Technics
1022
Teknika
1021, 1022, 1023
Teleavia
1073
Telefunken
1073
Teletech
1090, 1091
Tenosal
1079, 1090
Tensai
1072, 1077, 1079,
1090
Tevion
1074
Thomson
1073, 1087
Thorn
1073
Tivo
1035, 1036, 1037,
1039, 1040, 1060,
1061, 1062
TMK
1020
Tokai
1077, 1079, 1090
Tonsai
1079
Toshiba
1004, 1005, 1034,
1051, 1063, 1066,
1073, 1078, 1086,
1099, 1102, 1119,
1144
Totevision
1020, 1021
Touch
1066
Towada
1079, 1090
Towika
1079, 1090
TVA
1076
Uher
1077
UltimateTV
1065
Ultravox
1091
Unitech
1020
United Quick Star 1075, 1091
Universum
1072, 1077, 1078
Vector Research 1018
Video Concepts 1018
Videon
1074
Videosonic
1020
Viewsonic
1066
Voodoo
1066
Wards
1020, 1021, 1022,
1023
Weltblick
1077
XR-1000
1022, 1023
Yamaha
1018, 1019
Yamishi
1079, 1090
Yokan
1079, 1090
Yoko
1076, 1077, 1079,
1090
Zenith
1032
ZT Group
1066
DVD
4Kus
Accurian
Advent
AEG
Airis
Aiwa
Akai
Akura
2097
2220
2169, 2201
2312
2318
2272
2170, 2195, 2225,
2227
2310
Alba
2018, 2232, 2247,
2259, 2264
Alco
2199
Alize
2315
Allegro
2215
Amitech
2312
Amphion MediaWorks
2145
AMW
2145, 2313
Apex
2044, 2045, 2046,
2047, 2076, 2208,
2209
Apple
2163
Arrgo
2216
Asono
2318
Aspire
2140, 2202
Astar
2162
ATACOM
2318
Audiovox
2111, 2199
Avious
2317
Awa
2313
Axion
2171
Bang & Olufsen 2210
Baze
2317
BBK
2318
Bellagio
2313
Best Buy
2309
Blaupunkt
2209
Blue Parade
2207
Boghe
2300
Brainwave
2312
Brandt
2198, 2238
Broksonic
2192, 2195
Bush
2018, 2060, 2248,
2264, 2301, 2308,
2317, 2350, 2368
California Audio Labs
2197
Cambridge Audio 2304
CAT
2306, 2307
CAVS
2146
Centrum
2307
CGV
2304, 2312
Changhong
2222
Cinetec
2313
CineVision
2191, 2215
Clatronic
2308, 2317
Coby
2077, 2124, 2314
Conia
2301
Continental Edison
2313
Crown
2312
C-Tech
2305
Curtis Mathes 2217
CVG
2299
CyberHome
2048, 2068, 2216,
2233, 2258
Cytron
2166
Daenyx
2313
Daewoo
2083, 2215, 2280,
2299, 2312, 2313,
2326, 2376
Daewoo International
2313
Dalton
2311
Dansai
2303, 2312
Daytek
2145, 2234, 2313
Dayton
2313
DEC
2308
Decca
2312
Denon
2105, 2147, 2197,
2286
Denver
2288, 2308, 2310,
2314
Denzel
2302
Desay
Diamond
DiamondVision
Disney
DK Digital
Dmtech
Dual
Durabrand
DVX
Easy Home
Eclipse
E-Dem
Electrohome
Elin
Elta
Emerson
Enterprise
Enzer
Epson
ESA
Finlux
Fintec
Fisher
Funai
Gateway
GE
Gericom
GFM
Giec
Global Solutions
Global Sphere
Go Video
Goodmans
2159
2304, 2305
2179, 2186
2078, 2088
2257
2226
2302
2218
2305
2309
2304
2318
2312
2312
2263, 2312, 2315
2196, 2211, 2219
2211
2302
2165
2219
2304, 2312, 2317
2299
2212
2219
2097
2079, 2206, 2209
2269
2176
2300
2305
2305
2135, 2215
2247, 2289, 2298,
2300, 2308, 2330,
2369
GPX
2177
Gradiente
2197
Graetz
2302
Greenhill
2209
Grundig
2271
Grunkel
2312, 2316
GVG
2299
H&B
2308
H_her
2318
Haaz
2304, 2305
Haier
2172
Harman/Kardon
2125, 2213
HiMAX
2309
Hitachi
2008, 2033, 2108,
2302, 2309, 2320,
2366
Hiteker
2208
Home Tech Industries
2318
Hyundai
2316
Ilo
2167
Initial
2167, 2209
Innovation
2228
Insignia
2080, 2175, 2219
Integra
2207
Irradio
2103
iSymphony
2164
JBL
2213
JVC
2049, 2050, 2051,
2052, 2053, 2054,
2055, 2056, 2057,
2070, 2242, 2261,
2275, 2276, 2277,
2278, 2339, 2340,
2341, 2342, 2386,
2387, 2389, 2390,
2391
Jwin
2148
Kansai
2314
Kawasaki
2199
Kennex
Kenwood
KeyPlug
Kiiro
Kingavon
Kiss
KLH
Koda
Koss
KXD
Landel
Lasonic
Lawson
Lecson
Lenco
Lenoxx
LG
Life
Lifetec
Limit
Liquid Video
Liteon
Loewe
LogicLab
Magnavox
Magnex
Majestic
Marantz
Marquant
Matsui
McIntosh
Mecotek
Medion
Memorex
MiCO
Micromaxx
Microsoft
Microstar
Minoka
Minowa
Mintek
Mitsubishi
Mizuda
Monyka
Mustek
Mx Onda
Mystral
Naiko
Nesa
Neufunk
Nevir
Next Base
Nexxtech
NU-TEC
Onkyo
Oopla
Oppo
Optim
Optimus
Orava
Orbit
Orion
Oritron
P&B
Pacific
Panasonic
2312
2123, 2197, 2270
2312
2312
2308
2302
2199, 2209
2308
2095, 2198, 2204
2309
2221
2214
2305
2303
2308, 2312, 2317
2203, 2218
2080, 2107, 2115,
2116, 2141, 2188,
2211, 2215, 2237,
2239, 2285, 2293,
2295, 2348, 2370
2228
2228
2305
2204
2097, 2121, 2220
2274
2305
2075, 2096, 2178,
2180, 2196, 2205,
2219, 2308
2317
2314
2282
2312
2198, 2296
2149
2312
2228
2078, 2184, 2195
2300, 2304
2228
2206
2228
2312
2317
2167, 2209
2081
2308, 2309
2302
2232
2304
2316
2312
2209
2302
2312
2221
2161
2301
2205, 2290
2097
2150, 2173
2303
2230
2308
2313
2027, 2060
2198, 2204
2308
2305
2015, 2016, 2017,
2036, 2037, 2038,
2039, 2040, 2041,
2042, 2043, 2074,
Parasound
peeKTON
Philips
Phonotrend
Pioneer
Pointer
Polaroid
Portland
Powerpoint
Prima
Proceed
Proscan
Prosonic
Protron
Provision
Pye
Qwestar
Raite
RCA
RedStar
Regent
Reoc
Rimax
Rio
Roadstar
Ronin
Rotel
Rowa
Rownsonic
Saba
Sabaki
Saivod
Sampo
Samsung
Sansui
Sanyo
ScanMagic
2089, 2104, 2108,
2112, 2120, 2131,
2132, 2197, 2205,
2244, 2245, 2246,
2253, 2254, 2255,
2292, 2321, 2324,
2327, 2328, 2329,
2331, 2383, 2388
2151
2318
2026, 2061, 2062,
2075, 2090, 2094,
2096, 2097, 2103,
2110, 2126, 2180,
2193, 2205, 2231,
2235, 2241, 2251,
2252, 2256, 2260,
2268, 2282, 2332,
2333, 2343, 2344,
2345, 2367, 2371,
2373, 2380, 2382,
2385
2317
2012, 2013, 2014,
2063, 2064, 2065,
2066, 2067, 2113,
2134, 2207, 2230,
2236, 2265, 2266,
2267, 2297, 2322,
2351, 2352, 2353,
2354, 2355, 2356,
2357, 2358, 2359,
2377
2312
2047, 2133, 2185
2312
2313
2174
2208
2206
2299, 2314
2152
2308
2194
2198
2302
2058, 2059, 2071,
2079, 2183, 2199,
2206, 2207, 2209
2310, 2312, 2314
2203
2305
2315
2215
2281, 2308
2313
2153
2200, 2301
2307
2198, 2238
2305
2312
2223
2031, 2032, 2033,
2034, 2035, 2082,
2127, 2137, 2138,
2154, 2182, 2197,
2283, 2319, 2325,
2346, 2347, 2349,
2372, 2381
2027, 2195, 2304,
2305, 2312
2139, 2195, 2212,
2374
2232
viii
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
Scientific Labs
Scott
Seeltech
SEG
2312
2226
2305
2243, 2311
2318
2240, 2302, 2305,
2313
Sharp
2009, 2010, 2084,
2122, 2142, 2143,
2144, 2181, 2190,
2228, 2262, 2375
Shinsonic
2167
Sigmatek
2309, 2318
Silva
2310
Singer
2304, 2305
Skymaster
2279, 2305
Skyworth
2310
Slim Art
2312
SM Electronic 2305
Sonic Blue
2215
Sontech
2316
Sony
2005, 2006, 2007,
2020, 2021, 2022,
2023, 2024, 2025,
2069, 2072, 2073,
2085, 2086, 2087,
2091, 2092, 2093,
2102, 2128, 2129,
2130, 2249, 2250,
2323, 2334, 2335,
2336, 2360, 2361,
2362, 2363, 2364,
2365, 2384
Soundmaster
2305
Soundmax
2305
Spectra
2313
Spectroniq
2155
Standard
2305
Star Cluster
2305
Starmedia
2308, 2318
Sungale
2158
Sunkai
2312
Superscan
2196
Supervision
2305
Sylvania
2094, 2180, 2189,
2196, 2219, 2224
Symphonic
2062, 2180
Synn
2305
T.D.E. Systems 2316
Tatung
2083, 2312
TCM
2228, 2379
Teac
2199, 2287, 2301,
2305
Tec
2310
Technics
2197
Technika
2312, 2317
Telefunken
2307
Tensai
2312
Tevion
2228, 2305, 2311
Theta Digital 2207
Thomson
2229, 2238, 2284,
2294
Tokai
2302, 2310
Top Suxess
2318
Toshiba
2004, 2026, 2027,
2028, 2029, 2030,
2098, 2099, 2100,
2101, 2114, 2117,
2118, 2119, 2136,
2187, 2195, 2205,
2291, 2337, 2338,
2378
TRANScontinents
2313, 2317
Transonic
2317
ix
Trio
Trutech
TruVision
TSM
Umax
United
Urban Concepts
US Logic
Venturer
Viewmaster
Vocopro
VocoStar
Waitec
Welltech
Westinghouse
Wharfedale
Woxter
Xbox
Xlogic
XMS
Xoro
Yamada
Yamaha
Yamakawa
Yukai
Zenith
2312
2160
2309
2318
2315
2317
2205
2167
2199
2318
2156
2157
2318
2300
2109, 2168
2304, 2305
2315, 2318
2206, 2229
2305, 2312
2312
2300
2097, 2313, 2315
2000, 2001, 2002,
2003, 2011, 2018,
2019, 2036, 2106,
2197, 2273
2302, 2313
2232
2080, 2141, 2205,
2211, 2215
Blu-ray Disc
LG
Panasonic
Pioneer
Samsung
Sharp
Sony
Yamaha
2115
2089, 2131, 2132
2134
2035, 2127
2142, 2143, 2144
2025
2018
DVR
Bush
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
RCA
Samsung
Yamaha
2060
2037, 2038, 2039,
2040, 2041, 2042
2061, 2062
2063, 2064, 2065,
2066, 2067
2059
2035
2036
DVD Recorder
Aspire
Astar
Broksonic
Go Video
Hitachi
Insignia
Irradio
JVC
LG
Liteon
Panasonic
Philips
Pioneer
Pye
Samsung
Sansui
Sanyo
2140
2162
2192
2135
2108
2080
2103
2054, 2055, 2056,
2057
2107, 2115, 2141,
2188
2121
2037, 2038, 2039,
2041, 2042, 2043,
2089, 2104, 2108,
2112
2090, 2096, 2097,
2126, 2193
2067, 2113
2194
2034, 2082, 2138
2027
2139
Sony
Sylvania
Toshiba
Yamaha
2022, 2023, 2024,
2085, 2086, 2087,
2102, 2128, 2129,
2130
2189
2030, 2099, 2100,
2101, 2114, 2117,
2118, 2119
2106
Cable
ABC
3004, 3015, 3016,
3017, 3037, 3040,
3067, 3080, 3081
ADB
3070
Adelphia
3003
Alcatel
3066
Americast
3046
Amstrad
3048, 3068
Antronix
3019, 3020
Archer
3020
Arcon
3048
AT&T
3013
Axis
3048
Bell South
3046
Cable Vision
3014
Cabletenna
3019
Cabletime
3058
Cableview
3005
Clearmaster
3045
ClearMax
3045
Clyde Cablevision
3059
Colour Voice 3022
Comcast
3006, 3010, 3039
Comcrypt
3057
Comtronics
3023
Contec
3024
Coolmax
3045
COX
3006
Cryptovision
3060
Director
3006
Eastern
3025
Everquest
3041
Fidelity
3048
Filmnet
3057
Filmnet Cablecrypt
3061
Filmnet Comcrypt
3061
Finlux
3051
Focus
3044
Foxtel
3068
France Telecom 3054, 3055
Freebox
3069
GC Electronics 3020
GE
3015, 3016
GEC
3059
Gemini
3026, 3041
General Instrument
3006, 3008, 3016,
3039, 3050, 3067,
3075
Goldstar
3042
Gooding
3049
Grundig
3048, 3049
Hamlin
3027, 3028
Hirschmann
3051
Hitachi
3016
HomeChoice 3056
Humax
3001, 3002, 3071
ITT Nokia
3051
Jasco
3041
Jerrold
3006, 3008, 3016,
3026, 3037, 3041,
3050, 3064, 3067,
3075
JVC
3049
Kabel Deutschland
3043, 3073, 3074
Macab
3055
Magnavox
3029
Maspro
3049
Matsui
3049
MegaCable
3039
Memorex
3030, 3040
Minerva
3049
Mnet
3057
Motorola
3006, 3008, 3010,
3013, 3039, 3072,
3075
Movie Time
3031, 3063
Mr Zapp
3055
Multichoice
3057
Multitech
3045
NEC
3018
NET Brazil
3007
Nokia
3051
Noos
3055
NSC
3031
Oak
3024
Pace
3011, 3043, 3084
Palladium
3049
Panasonic
3034, 3036, 3040
Paragon
3040
Philips
3021, 3022, 3029,
3049, 3053, 3054,
3055
Pioneer
3012, 3032, 3038,
3042, 3048, 3083,
3084
Popular Mechanics
3044
Proscan
3015, 3016
Pulsar
3040
PVP Stereo Visual Matrix
3064
Quasar
3040
RadioShack
3041, 3045
RCA
3005, 3036, 3076,
3077
Realistic
3020
Recoton
3044
Regal
3028
Regency
3025
Rembrandt
3016
Runco
3040
Sagem
3055
Samsung
3011, 3023, 3032,
3042
SAT
3048
Scientific Atlanta 3003, 3004, 3011,
3012, 3013, 3062,
3078, 3079, 3080,
3081, 3082, 3083,
3084
Signal
3026, 3041
Signature
3016
Sony
3014, 3047
Sprucer
3036
Standard Component
3033
Starcom
3026, 3037, 3041,
3067
Stargate
3026, 3041
Starquest
3026, 3041
Supercable
3008
Supermax
3045
Tele+1
Telepiu
Thomson
TIME WARNER
Tocom
Torx
Toshiba
Tristar
Tudi
Tusa
TV86
Unika
United Cable
Universal
Universum
V2
Videoway
View Star
Viewmaster
Vision
Visiopass
Vortex View
Wittenberg
Zenith
Zentek
3057, 3061
3057
3000, 3009
3006
3017
3067
3040
3045
3052
3026, 3041
3031
3019, 3020
3037, 3064
3019, 3020
3049, 3051
3045
3065
3024, 3029, 3031
3045
3045
3051, 3054, 3055
3045
3048
3035, 3040, 3046
3044
Sattelite
AB Sat
AccessHD
ADB
AGS
Akai
Alba
Aldes
Allsat
Allsonic
Alltech
Alpha
Alpha Digital
Alphastar
Amitronica
Amstrad
Anglo
Ankaro
Anttron
Apollo
Armstrong
Artec
Asat
ASLF
Astacom
Astra
Astro
AudioTon
Aurora
Austar
Axiel
Axis
Best
Blaupunkt
Blue Sky
Boca
Boston
Brain Wave
Broadcast
Broco
BSkyB
4138, 4139
4058
4142
4138
4101, 4103
4083, 4084, 4085,
4086, 4108, 4139
4085, 4087, 4088
4098, 4101, 4103
4074, 4087, 4090
4139
4103
4058
4031
4139
4089, 4113, 4136,
4139
4139
4074, 4087, 4090,
4139
4083, 4086
4083
4089, 4103
4054
4101, 4103
4139
4138
4089, 4091, 4100,
4137, 4139
4074, 4086, 4088,
4090, 4093, 4135,
4136, 4137
4086, 4098
4140
4140
4138
4074, 4090, 4091,
4096
4074, 4090
4093
4139
4089, 4100, 4105,
4139
4138
4095
4094
4139
4113, 4123
BT
Bubu Sat
Bush
Cambridge
Canal Satellite
Canal+
CaptiveWorks
Channel Master
Chaparral
CHEROKEE
Chess
CityCom
Clatronic
CNT
Comag
4138
4139
4084, 4127
4136
4135
4135
4049
4060, 4085
4025
4138
4134, 4139
4084, 4133, 4137
4095
4088
4000, 4001, 4002,
4003, 4004
Commlink
4087
Comtech
4096
Condor
4074, 4090, 4137
Connexions
4074, 4092
Conrad
4074, 4133, 4136,
4137
Conrad Electronic 4137, 4139
Contec
4096
Coolsat
4050
Cosat
4098
Coship
4063
Crown
4089
Daeryung
4092
Daewoo
4107, 4139
DDC
4085
Delega
4085
Dew
4096
Diamond
4097
Digiality
4137
Digital Stream 4059
DIRECTV
4017, 4018, 4020,
4021, 4022, 4024,
4037, 4038, 4040,
4041, 4043, 4045,
4057, 4106, 4143,
4144, 4145, 4146,
4147, 4148, 4149,
4150, 4151, 4152,
4153, 4154, 4155,
4156, 4157
Discoverer
4134
Discovery
4138
Diseqc
4138
Dish Network 4011, 4012, 4013,
4014, 4019, 4039,
4064
Dishpro
4039, 4064
Distrisat
4103
Ditristrad
4098
DNT
4092, 4101, 4103
Drake
4026
DStv
4140
Dune
4074
Echostar
4011, 4019, 4039,
4064, 4092, 4139
Einhell
4083, 4087, 4089,
4136, 4139
Elap
4138, 4139
Elekta
4088
Elsat
4139
Elta
4074, 4083, 4090,
4098, 4101, 4103
Emanon
4083
Emme Esse
4074, 4090
Engel
4139
Ep Sat
4084
EURIEULT
4077
Eurodec
4102
Europa
4103, 4136, 4137
Europhon
Eurosat
Eurosky
4137
4089
4074, 4089, 4090,
4133, 4136, 4137
Eurostar
4089, 4133, 4137
Eutelsat
4139
Exator
4083, 4086
Expressvu
4039
Fenner
4074, 4134, 4139
Ferguson
4084, 4102, 4132
Fidelity
4136
Finlandia
4084
Finlux
4084
FinnSat
4096, 4102
Flair Mate
4139
Foxtel
4140
Freecom
4083, 4099, 4136
FTEmaximal 4074, 4139
Fuba
4074, 4083, 4090,
4092, 4093, 4101,
4133
Galaxis
4074, 4087, 4090,
4091, 4096, 4098,
4133, 4140
GE
4015, 4016, 4061,
4151
General Instrument
4027, 4065
GMI
4089
GOI
4039
Goldbox
4135
GoldStar
4099
Goodmans
4079, 4080, 4084
Goodmind
4061
Grandin
4077
Grothusen
4083, 4099
Grundig
4084, 4086, 4093,
4113, 4129, 4136,
4140
Hänsel & Gretel 4137
Hantor
4083, 4095
Hanuri
4088
Hauppauge
4126
Heliocom
4137
Helium
4137
Hinari
4085
Hirschmann
4074, 4093, 4128,
4136, 4137, 4138
Hisawa
4095
Hisense
4066
Hitachi
4032, 4084, 4149,
4153
Homecast
4005, 4006, 4007
Houston
4098
HTS
4039
Hughes
4018, 4022, 4144,
4146, 4150, 4152
Hughes Network Systems
4021
Humax
4051, 4075, 4076,
4110
Huth
4087, 4089, 4094,
4095, 4096, 4098,
4137, 4141
Hypson
4077
Ilo
4066
Imex
4077
Innovation
4090
Insignia
4057
Intertronic
4089
Intervision
4098, 4137
ITT Nokia
4084
Jerrold
4065
Johansson
4095
JOK
4138
JSR
JVC
4098
4011, 4019, 4039,
4079
Kamm
4139
Kathrein
4093, 4101, 4103,
4109, 4112, 4120,
4133, 4138, 4139
Kathrein Eurostar 4133
Klap
4138
Konig
4137
Kosmos
4099
KR
4086
Kreiselmeyer 4093
K-SAT
4139
Kyostar
4083
L&S Electronic 4074
Lasat
4074, 4088, 4090,
4100, 4133, 4134,
4137
Lasonic
4062
Lenco
4074, 4083, 4099,
4133, 4137, 4139
Leng
4095
Lennox
4098
Lenson
4136
Lexus
4103
LG
4053, 4057, 4099
Lifesat
4074, 4090, 4134,
4139
Lifetec
4090
Lorenzen
4137
Lorraine
4099
Lupus
4074, 4090
Luxor
4136
Lyonnaise
4102
Macab
4102
Magnavox
4045, 4055
Manata
4077, 4138, 4139
Manhattan
4084, 4088, 4098,
4138
Marantz
4101
Mascom
4088
Maspro
4084, 4139
Matsui
4138
Max
4137
Mediabox
4135
Mediamarkt
4089
Mediasat
4091, 4135, 4136
Medion
4074, 4090, 4139
Medison
4139
Mega
4101, 4103
Memorex
4045
Metronic
4077, 4078, 4083,
4086, 4087, 4088,
4139
Metz
4093
Micro electronic 4136, 4137, 4139
Micro Technology 4139
MicroGem
4056
Micromaxx
4074, 4090
Microstar
4090
Microtec
4139
Minerva
4093
Mitsubishi
4084, 4093, 4152
Mitsumi
4100
Morgan’s
4089, 4100, 4101,
4103, 4139
Motorola
4008, 4009, 4010,
4065
Multichoice
4140
Multitec
4134
Muratto
4099
Mysat
4139
Navex
4095
x
Neuhaus
Neusat
Next Level
NextWave
Nikko
Nokia
Nordmende
Nova
Novis
Oceanic
Octagon
Okano
Optex
Optus
Orbitech
OSat
Otto Versand
Pace
Pacific
Packsat
Palcom
Palladium
Palsat
Panasat
Panasonic
Panda
Pansat
Patriot
Paysat
PCT
Philco
Philips
Phoenix
Phonotrend
Pioneer
Polsat
Predki
Premiere
Priesner
Primestar
Profile
Promax
Prosat
Proscan
Protek
Proton
Provision
Quadral
Quelle
Quiero
RadioShack
Radiola
Radix
Rainbow
RCA
Realistic
Redpoint
Redstar
RFT
Roadstar
xi
4091, 4098, 4136,
4137, 4139
4139
4065
4141
4089, 4139
4084, 4122
4083, 4084, 4085,
4088, 4102
4140
4095
4097
4083, 4086, 4096
4089
4098
4135, 4140, 4141
4083, 4134, 4135,
4136
4086
4093
4084, 4093, 4113,
4121, 4125, 4138
4097
4138
4085
4089, 4136
4134, 4136
4140
4043, 4044, 4046,
4084, 4113, 4118,
4143, 4148
4084, 4137
4047
4138
4045
4060
4055
4021, 4022, 4045,
4084, 4101, 4103,
4111, 4115, 4135,
4138, 4150, 4152,
4153, 4155, 4156
4096
4084, 4087, 4098
4124, 4135
4102
4095
4098, 4135
4089
4030
4138
4084
4085, 4087
4015, 4016, 4040,
4151
4097
4066
4088
4074, 4085, 4087,
4090, 4138
4093, 4133, 4137
4102
4065
4101, 4103
4092, 4119
4086
4015, 4016, 4034,
4035, 4036, 4037,
4038, 4040, 4151,
4157
4028
4091
4074, 4090
4087, 4101, 4103
4139
Roch
Rover
Saba
4077
4074, 4139
4088, 4133, 4137,
4138
Sabre
4084
Sagem
4069, 4102
Sakura
4096
Samsung
4018, 4021, 4023,
4041, 4042, 4081,
4082, 4083, 4114,
4150, 4154
SAT
4085, 4136
Sat Cruiser
4141
Sat Partner
4083, 4086, 4088,
4095, 4099, 4136
Sat Team
4139
Satcom
4094, 4137
Satec
4139
Satelco
4074
Satford
4094
Satmaster
4094
Satplus
4134
Schneider
4090, 4134, 4138
Schwaiger
4097, 4134, 4137
SCS
4133
Seemann
4089, 4091, 4092
SEG
4074, 4083, 4090,
4095
Seleco
4098
Servi Sat
4077, 4139
Siemens
4093
Silva
4099
Skantin
4139
Skardin
4091
Skinsat
4136
SKR
4139
Skymaster
4067, 4068, 4087,
4134, 4139
Skymax
4101, 4103
SkySat
4134, 4136, 4137,
4139
Skyvision
4098
SM Electronic 4134, 4139
Smart
4133, 4139
Sony
4017, 4020, 4135
SR
4089, 4100
Star Choice
4065
Starland
4139
Starring
4095
Start Trak
4083
Strong
4074, 4083, 4086,
4090, 4099, 4140
STS
4033
STVI
4077
Sumida
4089
Sunny Sound 4074
Sunsat
4139
Sunstar
4074, 4089, 4100
Supermax
4141
Tandberg
4102
Tandy
4086
Tantec
4084
TCM
4090
Techniland
4094
TechniSat
4071, 4072, 4073,
4092, 4103, 4116,
4117, 4134, 4135,
4136
Technology
4140
Technosat
4141
Technowelt
4137
Teco
4089, 4100
Telanor
4085
Telasat
4133, 4137
Telecom
4139
Telefunken
Teleka
Telemaster
Telesat
Telestar
Televes
Telewire
Tempo
Tevion
Thomson
Thorens
Thorn
Tivax
Tivo
Tokai
Tonna
Toshiba
Triad
Triasat
Triax
Turnsat
Tvonics
Twinner
UEC
Uher
UltimateTV
Uniden
Unisat
Unitor
Universum
US Digital
Variosat
Vega
Ventana
Viewsat
Visiosat
Voom
Vortec
Welltech
WeTeKom
Wevasat
Wewa
Winersat
Wisi
Woorisat
Worldsat
Xrypton
XSat
Zehnder
Zenith
Zodiac
4067, 4083, 4138
4086, 4089, 4092,
4136, 4137
4088
4137
4134, 4135, 4136
4084, 4136
4098
4141
4090, 4139
4070, 4084, 4102,
4104, 4130, 4133,
4135, 4137, 4138,
4139
4097
4084
4058
4150
4103
4084, 4094, 4098,
4136, 4139
4144, 4152, 4153
4099
4136
4093, 4133, 4136,
4139
4139
4132
4077, 4139
4140
4134
4020
4029, 4045
4089, 4096, 4103
4095
4093, 4133, 4137
4066
4093
4074
4101, 4103
4048
4095, 4098, 4138,
4139
4065
4083
4134
4134, 4136
4084
4084
4095
4084, 4092, 4093,
4136, 4137
4088
4138
4074
4139
4074, 4088, 4090,
4131, 4133
4052, 4057, 4145
4086
CD
Yamaha
5000, 5013
CD Recoder
Yamaha
5001
MD
Yamaha
5002, 5003, 5004
Tape
Yamaha
5005, 5006
Tuner
Yamaha
5007, 5008, 5009,
5010, 5014, 5015,
5016, 5017, 5018
USB
Yamaha
5012, 5021
DOCK
Yamaha
5011, 5022
LD
Yamaha
2002
00_RX-V2065_G_cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, July 23, 2009 10:40 AM
G
RX-V2065
RX-V2065
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
BRUKSANVISNING
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
© 2009 Yamaha Corporation All rights reserved.
Black process 45.0° 240.0 LPI
Printed in Malaysia
WS30760